DMR-EX86 - DVD Recorder PANASONIC - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free DMR-EX86 PANASONIC in PDF.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DVD Recorder
📄 96 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - page 1
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type DVD Recorder with HDD
Brand Panasonic
Model DMR-EX86
Dimensions (W x H x D) 430 x 69 x 295 mm
Weight 4.0 kg
Power Supply AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption 28 W (operation), <0.5 W (standby)
Recording Media DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW
Hard Disk Drive Capacity 80 GB
TV Tuner Digital Freeview
Playback Formats DVD-Video, DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW, CD, MP3, JPEG, DivX
Inputs Scart (x2), S-Video, Composite, Component, USB
Outputs HDMI, Scart, S-Video, Composite, Component, Digital Audio
Recording Modes XP, SP, LP, EP, FR
Editing Functions Playlist, Chapter Mark, Title Delete
Cleaning Clean with a soft, dry cloth. Avoid solvents.
Safety Do not expose to moisture or extreme temperatures.
Included Accessories Remote control, RF cable, Scart cable, Batteries, Manual
Repair Parts Availability Contact Panasonic service for spare parts.
Manufacturer Panasonic Corporation

Frequently Asked Questions - DMR-EX86 PANASONIC

How do I connect the DMR-EX86 to my TV?
Use an HDMI cable for best quality, or a Scart cable. Connect the HDMI output to your TV's HDMI input, or use the Scart socket labeled 'TV'.
Can I record from external devices?
Yes, use the front or rear AV inputs. Select the appropriate input source on the recorder.
How do I set the clock?
Go to 'Setup' > 'Clock Settings' and set it manually or enable 'Auto Clock' from the digital tuner.
Why won't the disc play?
Ensure the disc is correctly inserted label-side up. Check that the disc format is compatible (DVD-Video, CD, etc.). Clean the disc if necessary.
How do I record a program?
Press the 'REC' button to start recording. You can set a timer using 'Timer Recording' in the menu.
Can I transfer recordings to a PC?
Yes, via USB. Connect a USB drive, go to 'Copy' > 'HDD to USB', and follow on-screen instructions.
What is the hard disk capacity?
The internal HDD has a capacity of 80 GB, allowing up to 130 hours of recording in EP mode.
How do I reset the unit?
Press and hold the 'POWER' button on the front panel for 10 seconds while the unit is on. This will reset to factory defaults.
Does it support DivX playback?
Yes, the DMR-EX86 plays DivX files from disc or USB. Ensure the files are not DRM-protected.
Where can I find a replacement remote?
Contact Panasonic support or visit their website to order a replacement remote control (model EUR7642).

User questions about DMR-EX86 PANASONIC

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

Your email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone answers your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your DVD Recorder in PDF format for free! Find your manual DMR-EX86 - PANASONIC and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. DMR-EX86 by PANASONIC.

USER MANUAL DMR-EX86 PANASONIC

Operating Instructions

DVD Recorder

Model No. DMR-EX86EB

DIGA

Front view of a gray rectangular air conditioner unit (no text or symbols visible)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Model No. DMR-EX86EB - 3

Thank you for purchasing this product.

Please read these instructions carefully before using this product, and save this manual for future use.

VIDEO RAMPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Model No. DMR-EX86EB - 4

RW/RPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Model No. DMR-EX86EB - 5

DIGITAL VIDEOPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Model No. DMR-EX86EB - 6

Digital Video BroadcastingPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Model No. DMR-EX86EB - 7

DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.

Notice for DVB functions

This DVD Recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not Pay TV or encrypted channels unless connected to an external source capable of receiving Pay TV or encrypted channels.

This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.

Region number supported by this unit

Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according to where they are sold.

  • The region number of this unit is "2".
  • The unit will play DVDs marked with labels containing "2" or "ALL".

Example:

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Example: - 1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Example: - 2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Example: - 3

Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com

Model number suffix "EB" denotes UK model.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Example: - 4

Convenient Functions!

Linked operations with the TV

You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using VIERA Link or Q Link.

- Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link "HDAVI Control™"/Q Link) (⇒ 43)

VIERA M M DIGA VIERA Link VIERA remote control

Pause the TV programme you are watching

- Pause Live TV (⇔ 42)

Linked timer recordings with external equipment

You can set the Timer Recordings on Digital STB/Digital Satellite Receiver when it is connected to this unit with Scart cable.

- Ext Link (⇒ 28)

High Quality Picture

HDMI

  • Connection with HDMI terminal (→ 12)
  • Deep Colour (→ 92)

Easy access to various functions

You can access the main function quickly and easily from FUNCTION MENU.

  • FUNCTION MENU Display (⇒ 42)

Select a function and an item. You can access selected function easily.

FREEVIEW+TM functions

• Guide Link (→ 22) - Series recording (⇒ 34) - Split Programme (→ 22)

Easy to Find and Select!

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles screen

Two or more titles recorded in the daily/weekly or series timer recording mode are bundled and displayed as one item.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles HDD VIDEO PICTURE MUSIC 10/10 10/15 Grouped title Previous Page 02/02 Next OPTION Select Info Previous Next

To get the most up to date service from Freeview it is important for Freeview customers to retune from time to time.

How do I re-tune my Freeview Box?

The below instructions are a quick reference. If you have any problems, check your instruction manual or ask a friend or family member to show you how. Alternatively, go to your local electrical retailer, contact your manufacturer or visit freeview.co.uk/retune

Re-tuning only takes a few minutes, just follow the steps below:

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 2 Press [▲, ▼] to select "Others", then press [OK]. 3 Press [▲, ▼] to select "Setup", then press [OK]. 4 Press [▲, ▼] to select "Tuning", then press [▶]. 5 Press [▲, ▼] to select "DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality", then press [OK]. Please note: most digital TV recorders will keep your original recordings after running a re-tune but you will need to reset any future recordings. For detailed information on re-tuning your receiver please refer to page 71 of this instruction book.

Accessories

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Accessories - 1

Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement parts.

(Product numbers correct as of February 2013. These may be subject to change.)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Accessories - 2

□ 1 Remote control (N2QAYB000462)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Accessories - 3

□ 1 AC mains lead (K2CT2YY00098)

- For use with this unit only. Do not use it with other equipment. Also, do not use cords for other equipment with this unit.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Accessories - 4

☐ 2 Batteries for remote control (R6 Size)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Accessories - 5

☐ 1 RF coaxial cable (K1TWACC00003)

Sales and Support Information

Customer Communications Centre

●For customers within the UK: 0844 844 3899

●For customers within Ireland: 01 289 8333

- Monday–Friday 9:00 am - 5:00 pm (Excluding public holidays).

- For further support on your product, please visit our website: www.panasonic.co.uk

Direct Sales at Panasonic UK

Order accessory and consumable items for your product with ease and confidence by phoning our Customer Communications Centre Monday–Friday 9:00 am - 5:00 pm (Excluding public holidays).

Or go online through our Internet Accessory ordering application at www.pas-europe.com.

Most major credit and debit cards accepted.

All enquiries, transactions, and distribution facilities are provided directly by Panasonic UK.

It couldn't be simpler!

Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a wide range of finished products. Take a browse on our website for further details.

Caution for AC Mains Lead

(For the AC mains plug of three pins)

For your safety, please read the following text carefully.

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience.

A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug.

Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the

replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.

If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.

A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local dealer.

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differs according to the type of AC mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug fitted and follow the instructions below.

Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

  1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - How to replace the fuse - 1

  1. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - How to replace the fuse - 2

WARNING

Unit

- To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage, - Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing.

- Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on this unit.

– Use only the recommended accessories.

- Do not remove covers.

- Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

- Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.

- Do not place heavy items on this unit.

■ AC mains lead

● To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage,

- Ensure that the power supply voltage corresponds to the voltage printed on this unit.

- Insert the mains plug fully into the socket outlet.

- Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.

- Do not handle the plug with wet hands.

- Hold onto the mains plug body when disconnecting the plug.

- Do not use a damaged mains plug or socket outlet.

- The mains plug is the disconnecting device. Install this unit so that the mains plug can be unplugged from the socket outlet immediately.

CAUTION

Unit

  • This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
  • Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted candles, on this unit.
  • This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile telephones during use. If such interference occurs, please increase separation between this unit and the mobile telephone. • This unit is intended for use in moderate climates.

Placement

- Place this unit on an even surface.

- To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product damage, - Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit is well ventilated.

- Do not obstruct this unit's ventilation openings with newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.

- Do not place the unit on amplifiers/receivers or equipment that may become hot. The heat can damage the unit.

- Do not expose this unit to direct sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration.

Batteries

  • Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the type recommended by the manufacturer.
  • Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and may cause a fire.
  • Do not mix old and new batteries or different types at the same time.
  • Do not heat or expose to flame.
  • Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
  • Do not take apart or short circuit.
  • Do not recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
  • Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
  • Remove batteries if you do not intend to use the remote control for a long period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
  • When disposing the batteries, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Table of Contents

Getting started

Features 2

Accessories 3

Sales and Support Information 3

Caution for AC Mains Lead 3

Safety precautions. 4

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care. 6

Remote Control Information/Unit Care/Disc care ..... 7

Location of Parts/Controls 8

Remote Control 8

Main Unit 8

The Unit's Display 9

Rear Panel 9

Basic Connection 10

Connecting to a Television only 10 Adding a Digital Satellite Receiver: Connecting to a Television and a Digital Satellite Receiver 11

Connecting AC mains lead (included) 11

Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Cable (not included) 12

Setting the Channels and Clock. 13

HDD and Disc Handling. 15

Usable Discs for Recording and Playback 15

Play-only Discs 16

Discs that Cannot be Played 16

Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the type of connected TV. 16

USB Memory Handling 17

Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG) 17

Inserting Disc/USB memory 18

Inserting Discs 18

Inserting/Removing the USB memory 18

Basic Operations

Watching Television 19

Watching Digital Satellite Programmes 19

Playback 20

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs ..... 20

Recording Television Programmes 21

Timer Recording 22

Deleting Titles 23

DELETE Navigator 23

Deleting Titles During Playback 23

Advanced Features

Notes for Recording....24

Advanced Recording 25

Recording Modes and Durations 25

When the format confirmation screen is displayed ..... 26

When removing a Recorded or Copied Disc 26

Specifying the Recording Time — One Touch Recording ..... 26

Direct TV Recording 26

Flexible Recording 27

Playing while you are recording 27

Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver ..... 28

Manual Recording....28

Linked timer recordings with external equipment (SKY Digital STB/digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK ....28

Recording from an External Device. 29

Recording from a VCR, etc. 29

Advanced Timer Recording 30

Manual timer recordings .... 30

Language for broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle .... 30

To cancel a timer recording in progress 30

If the "Overlapped Timer Recording" screen appears ..... 31

Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or Resolve Overlapping 31

To deactivate timer programme (e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer programming) ..... 31

Relief Recording 32

Auto Renewal Recording 32

Making timer recordings on the television 32

Notes on timer recording 32

GUIDE Plus+ system.33
Using the GUIDE Plus+ list33
View advertisement33
Series recording34
Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or category34
Searching for the programme from the GUIDE Plus+ list.35
Advanced Playback36
Selecting Titles to Play36
Search37
Skip37
Quick View (Play × 1.3)37
Direct Play37
Slow-motion Play37
Frame-by-Frame Viewing37
Time Slip37
Manual Skip37
Create Chapters37
Playing Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)38
Showing the menu screen38
Playing music files38
Playing still pictures39
Start Slideshow39
Playing music41
To play music CD41
To play music recorded on HDD41
Useful functions during music play.41
Convenient Functions42
FUNCTION MENU Display42
To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV42
Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link "HDAVI ControlTM/Q Link)43
Easy control only with VIERA remote control.44
Information Messages45
Digital Channel Information45
Status Messages46
New Channel Message46
Entering Text46

Advanced Editing

Titles—Editing47
Accessing the Title View47
Title Operations47
Chapters—Creating and Editing49
Accessing the Chapter View49
Chapter Operations49
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Video)50
Accessing the Playlist (Video) View50
Creating Playlists (Video)50
Editing Playlists (Video)/Chapters50
Still Pictures and Music—Editing.52
Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View.52
Album (still picture)/Picture Operations52
Accessing the Album and Track View54
Album and Track Operation54
Deleting still pictures and music using DELETE Navigator54
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Picture)55
Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View55
Creating Playlists (Picture)55
Editing Playlists (Picture)56
Editing still pictures56
Copying titles or Playlists (Video)57
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]59
Copying using the copying list—Advanced Copy60
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL61
Copy Video ( MPEG2 ) from a video equipment62
Copying Still Pictures/Playlist (Picture)62
Copying using the copying list62
Copying new still pictures on USB memory—Copy New Pictures.63
Copying still pictures on the USB memory64
Copying music to HDD64
Copying music from a CD.64
Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL65

Setting Menus

Setting On-Screen Display .... 66 Accessing the On-Screen Display .... 66

HDD and DVD Management .... 68 Accessing the Management Menus .... 68

Setup Menu .... 70 Accessing the Setup Menu.... 70

Channel Settings 70 Playback/Recording Settings 72 Picture and Sound Settings 73

Display and Connection Settings/System Settings ..... 74 System Settings ..... 76

Other Settings

Other Settings77
Child Lock77
Using the Unit's Remote Control to Operate the TV.77

Reference

Additional Connections78
Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette Recorder78
Connecting to a Television with Audio/Video Cable (not included)78
Adding an Amplifier or Receiver79
Frequently Asked Questions80
Set up80
Discs80
DVB-T80
GUIDE Plus+81
Recording81
USB81
Music81
Messages82
On the Unit's Display82
On the TV83
Troubleshooting Guide84
When Other Panasonic Products Respond to this Remote Control84
To Reset This Unit84
General Issues:Power85
General Issues:Displays85
General Issues:Operation86
General Issues:GUIDE Plus+86
General Issues:DVB-T86
General Issues:VIERA Link87
General Issues:USB88
Playback Issues:Picture88
Playback Issues:Sound88
Playback Issues:Operation89
Playback Issues:Music90
Playback Issues:Still Pictures90
Recording Issues:Recording/Timer Recording/Copying/External input90
Recording Issues:Music91
Editing Issues: HDD & DVD92
Editing Issues: Still Pictures92
Glossary92
Specifications94
IndexBack Cover

- Pages to be referred to are indicated as "→ ○○".

The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device that is easily susceptible to damage.

As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.

■ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust

Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.

■ The HDD is a temporary storage device

The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.

■ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD

If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.

- When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

■ Setup precautions

  • Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
  • Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to vibration or impact.
  • Do not place on anything that generates heat like a video cassette recorder, etc.
  • Do not place in an area often subject to temperature changes.
  • Place in an area where condensation does not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon where moisture forms on a cold surface when there is an extreme change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the unit.
  • Conditions where condensation may occur

- When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.

- When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.

– During the rainy season.

In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until condensation is gone.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - ■ Setup precautions - 1

■ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or breakdown

Please be aware that the performance of the optical pick-up assembly may be adversely affected if the unit is exposed to nicotine smoke. If replacement is required due to this reason it will not be covered within the terms of warranty.

■ While operating

  • Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD may become damaged.)
  • Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket, or flip the power breaker switch.

While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or movement due to rotation is normal.

■ When moving the unit

① Turn the unit off. (Wait until "BYE" disappears from the display.) ② Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket. ③ Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx. 2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock. (Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a short time.)

■ HDD recording time remaining

This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.

If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a Playlist (Video) will not increase the amount of time.)

■ Indemnity concerning recorded content

Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).

Remote Control Information

About batteries

- Insert so the poles (+ and -) match those in the remote control.

Diagram of a device casing with battery compartment and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

R6/LR6, AA

- Use alkaline or manganese batteries.

Using the remote control

Aim at the sensor, avoiding obstacles, up to a maximum range of 7m directly in front of the unit.

Remote control signal sensor20° 30° 20° 30°

The distance and angles are approximate.

Unit Care

The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust. Cigarette smoke can also cause malfunction or breakdown.

To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

- Never use alcohol, paint thinner, or benzine to clean this unit. - Before using a chemically treated cloth, carefully read the instructions that came with the cloth.

Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and viewing with pleasure.

Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit's lens over time, making it impossible to record or play discs.

Use the lens cleaner (optional) to clean the unit's lens.

Lens cleaner: RP-CL720AE

- This lens cleaner may not be available for sale in all countries, e.g., not available in Germany. Please consult your Panasonic dealer for advice.

Do not place the unit on amplifiers or equipment that may become hot.

The heat can damage the unit.

This unit DO NOT

Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.

Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty. Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the unit.

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.

Examples of causes of such losses are:

  • A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
  • A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
  • A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.

Disc Care

Holding a disc

Handle discs by the edges to avoid inadvertently scratching or getting oil from your fingers on the disc. Do not touch the signal surface of discs (the shiny side).

Cleaning discs

Discs are not indestructible and occasionally dirt or condensation may appear. Clean by gently wiping with a soft, dry lint-free cloth in a straight line from the centre of the disc to the edge of the disc. Return discs to their cases when not in use; this helps to protect against scratches and dirt.

Storing discs

- Do not place or store discs in the following locations: - Direct sunlight

  • Very dusty or humid areas
  • Near a heat source
  • Places that undergo extreme shifts in temperature (condensation can occur)
  • Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur

Discs to avoid

●Discs that are not perfectly circular in shape - Warped discs, which may not balance properly in your unit, causing improper operation or damage to the unit - Cracked discs - Discs with exposed adhesive (from removed stickers or labels, such as may occur with rental discs or improperly cared-for discs that were previously labeled or re-labeled)

Remote Control1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 TV DRIVE SELECT AV VOL - PAGE CH V PROG/CHECK CHAPTER SKIP SLOW/SEARCH START STOP PAUSE PLAY/x13 PAUSE LIVE TV EXITSTATUS GUIDE FUNCTION MENU OK OPTION RETURN MANUAL SKIP -10s -+60s REC -REC MODE -EXTLINK DIRECT TV REL. +STHL DISPL…

① Turn the unit on or off ..... (→ 13)

② Select drive [HDD, DVD] ...... (⇒ 20, 21)

3 Select channels and title numbers etc./ Enter numbers....(⇒ 13)

4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still pictures or music ...... (⇒ 23, 31, 54)

5 Basic operations for recording and play [PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching (⇔ 42)

6 Show the digital channel information/Programme information within GUIDE Plus+ screen/Show status messages/Show Properties screen.... (→ 33, 45, 46, 47)

⑦ Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR ..... (→ 36, 38)

⑧ Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame.... (→ 13, 37)

9 Show OPTION menu – for accessing Slideshow or Standby Settings, etc.

- for playing or editing titles and still pictures, etc. (⇒ 36, 40, 47, 49) - for showing advertisements (⇒ 33)

- for searching for programmes (→ 35)

- for showing Audio Description screen (→ 45)

- for viewing the Top Menu of DVD-Video (→ 20)

10 Use Colour buttons (Red, Green, Yellow, Blue) according to on-screen instructions.

- for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (→ 36, 39, 41)

- for switching VIDEO/Playlists (→ 60)

- for switching PICTURE/Playlists (→ 62)

- for GUIDE Plus+ operations (→ 33)

- for deactivating timer programme (→ 31)

- for showing the Series Information screen (→ 34)

- for selecting programme category (→ 30, 34, 45)

- for editing Favourites (→ 70)

11 Recording function

[● REC]: Start recording ..... (→ 21)

[REC MODE]: Change recording mode ..... (→ 21)

[EXT LINK]: Linked timer recordings with external equipment.... (→ 28)

[● DIRECT TV REC]: Direct TV Recording ..... (→ 26)

12 DVB function [TEXT ☐]: Show Digital Teletext service.... (→ 45)

[STTL]: Show subtitles....(→ 45)

13 Transmission window 14 TV operations.... (→ 77)

15 Channel select/Change pages in the GUIDE Plus+ list... (→ 19, 21, 33)

16 Show timer recording list....(→ 30)

17 Input select (Tuner, AV1, AV2, AV3)....(→ 19, 28, 29)

18 Create chapters....(→ 37)

19 Exit the menu screen

20 Show the GUIDE Plus+ screen....(→ 19, 22, 33)

21 Show FUNCTION MENU (→ 42)

By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.

22 Return to previous screen

23 Skip approx. +60s (→ 37)

24 Skip approx. -10s (→ 37)

25 Skip the specified time ..... (→ 37)

26 Show menu for disc playback etc./Change DVB multi audio..... (→ 66)

Main Unit① Disc tray ② The unit's display ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ Pull to flip down the front panel. Remote control signal sensor

① Standby/on switch (⏻/l).... (⇒ 13) Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In standby mode, the unit still consumes a small amount of power.

③ AV3 input terminals.... (→ 29)

④ Disc tray open/close button.... (→ 20)

⑤ Channel Select button.... (→ 19, 21)

6 Start recording button.... (→ 21)

7 Stop button.... (→ 20, 21)

⑧ Play/×1.3 button.... (→ 20)

The Unit's Display

① Disc indicator This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted. ② Digital broadcast indicator Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast. ③ Copying indicator 4 USB port indicator 5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator....(→ 28)

HDD DVD 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 COPY USB EXT - L REC PLAY 9 10

① Disc indicator: This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted. ② Digital broadcast indicator: Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast. ③ Copying indicator: ④ USB port indicator: ⑤ Linked timer recordings with external equipment indicator: (→ 28)

6 Timer recording indicator ..... (→ 22) On: When a Timer recording programme is registered Flashes: When the unit cannot go to Timer recording standby 7 Drive [HDD, DVD] indicator 8 Main display section: Current time/playback counter, various messages 9 Remote control visual feedback: This flashes when it is operated by the remote control. 10 Recording/Playback indicator

Rear Panel

RF IN OUT 1 2 3 4 5 AV1 (IV) AV2 (EXT) 6 7 HDMI AV1/VT OPTICAL (USB/Liquid OUT POWER/RESET) 8 9 AC IN ~ DMR-EX86EB-K (USB/SG VQ7AA01002 R)

① Aerial input terminal ..... (⇒ 10, 11, 78)

② Aerial output terminal.... (→ 10, 11, 78)

③ AUDIO/VIDEO output terminals..... (→ 78, 79)

④ AV1 (TV) 21-pin Scart terminal ..... (⇒ 10, 11, 78)

TV set connection

⑤ AV2 (EXT) 21-pin Scart terminal..... (⇒ 11, 78)

Connection of an external unit

⑥ HDMI AV OUT terminal.... (⇒ 12, 79)

Digital audio and video output terminal

⑦ Digital audio output terminal .....(→ 79)

⑧ Cooling fan

⑨ Serial number

⑩ AC IN\~ = Power supply

Connection for the AC mains lead

21-pin Scart terminal

The 21-pin Scart terminal transmits both input and output signals for picture and sound.

TVs equipped with the same type of terminal can be connected here.

This type of terminal is also called Peritel, Euro Connector and Euro AV.

- When the unit is connected to a Q Link-compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, you can use convenient functions of Q Link.

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 21

AV1 Scart terminal (TV)

1 Audio output CH2 (R) 2 Audio input CH2 (R) 3 Audio output CH1 (L) 4 Audio ground 5 Blue ground 6 Audio input CH1 (L) 7 Blue output 8 Switching voltage output 9 Green ground 10 Q Link control signal 11 Green output 12 Reserved 13 Red ground 14 Blanking ground 15 Red output/chrominance output 16 Blanking output 17 Video ground 18 Video ground 19 Video output/luminance output 20 Video input 21 Ground

AV2 Scart terminal (EXT)

1 Audio output CH2(R) 2 Audio input CH2 (R) 3 Audio output CH1 (L) 4 Audio ground 5 Video ground 6 Audio input CH1 (L) 7 Reserved 8 Switching voltage input 9 Video ground 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Video ground 14 Video ground 15 Chrominance input 16 Reserved 17 Video ground 18 Video ground 19 Video output 20 Video input/luminance input 21 Ground

Use of the RF coaxial cable

  • Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables.
  • Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.

Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

  • You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (⇒ 43).
  • You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television. "AV1 Output" in the Setup menu is set to "RGB 1" or "RGB 2" (⇒ 75) Make "AV2 Input" settings in the Setup menu (⇒ 75)

Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions. BE SURE TO READ THE CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3.

Connecting to a Television onlygraph TD A["TV"] --> B["RF IN"] B --> C["AV"] B --> D["HDMI IN"] C --> E["This unit"] D --> E E --> F["AV1 (TV)"] E --> G["HDMI AV OUT"] H["1"] --> I["RF IN"] H --> J["RF OUT"] K["2"] --> L["To the aerial"] M["3"] --> N["The RF coaxial cable cannot be used for showing pictures from the unit. The uni…

① Aerial cable to the "RF IN" on the unit. ② RF coaxial cable (included) from the "RF OUT" on the unit to the "RF IN" on the TV. ③ 21-pin Scart cable from the "AV1 (TV)" on the unit to the "AV" on the TV.

Adding a Digital Satellite Receiver: Connecting to a Television and a Digital Satellite Receivergraph TD A["Digital satellite antenna"] -->|To the aerial| B["Digital satellite receiver"] B --> C["RF IN"] B --> D["DISH INPUT"] B --> E["RF OUT"] B --> F["HDMI OUT"] B --> G["AV/TV"] B --> H["AV/VCR"] B --> I["This unit"] I --> J["RF IN"] I --> K["RF OUT"] I --> L["AV1(TV)"] I --> M["AV2 (EXT)"] I…

① Aerial cable to the "RF IN" on the digital satellite receiver. ② RF coaxial cable from the "RF OUT" on the digital satellite receiver to the "RF IN" on the unit. ③ RF coaxial cable (included) from the "RF OUT" on the unit to the "RF IN/AERIAL" on the TV. ④ 21-pin Scart cable from the "AV/VCR" on the digital satellite receiver to the "AV2 (EXT)" on the unit. ⑤ 21-pin Scart cable from the "AV1 (TV)" on the unit to the "AV" on the TV. ⑥ 21-pin Scart cable from the "AV/TV" on the digital satellite receiver to the "AV" on the TV.

To view digital satellite programmes

Refer to "Watching Digital Satellite Programmes" (→ 19)

To record digital satellite programmes

Refer to "Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver" (→ 28)

Connect the unit directly to the television

If you connect the unit through an AV selector or video cassette recorder to the television, video signal will be affected by copyright protection systems and the picture may not be shown correctly.

- When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR

Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there are both television and VCR input terminals.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Connect the unit directly to the television - 1

Connecting AC mains lead (included)

Connect only after all other connections are complete.

This unitgraph LR A["AC IN~"] --> B["To household mains socket"]

When the unit is not to be used for a long time

To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off.

[approx. 0.3 W ("Power Save in Standby" is activated and "RF OUT (Aerial Signal)" is set to "Off".)]

After completing the above connections, proceed to the TV Tuning (⇒ 13).

Additional Connections

10,78

- You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection to the 21-pin Scart cable connection between this unit and your TV.

Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Cable (not included)

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted, enabling you to enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cable. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.

- Video sources converted to 1920x1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true, native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

- Use the High Speed HDMI cables. Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilized. It is recommended that you use Panasonic's HDMI cable. When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the "HDAVI Control" function, linked operations would be possible. [→ 43, Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link "HDAVI Control™"/Q Link)]

  • It is recommended that you use Panasonic's HDMI cable.
  • Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be used.

graph TD A["Digital Satellite receiver"] --> B["HDMI OUT"] A --> C["AV/VCR"] D["TV"] --> E["HDMI IN"] D --> F["HDMI IN"] D --> G["AV"] H["This unit"] --> I["AV1(TV)"] H --> J["AV2 (EXT)"] H --> K["HDMI AV OUT"] L["Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)"] --> M["Direct TV Recording (→ 26)"] L --> N["…

- Set "Digital Audio Output" to "HDMI and Optical" (⇒ 73).

(The default setting is "HDMI and Optical".)

To enjoy high-quality video up-converted to 1080p, you need to connect the unit to a 1080p-compatible HDTV and set "HDMI Video Format" in the Setup menu to "1080p" (⇒ 75).

Notes

  • If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2-channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down-mixed (⇒ 92) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable (some discs cannot be down-mixed).
  • You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital DVI input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):

Depending on the unit, the picture may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable (audio cannot be output).

Preparation:

  • Turn on the mains for the television (and connected equipment) and select the appropriate AV input to suit the connections to this unit.
  • These are the first settings you make upon buying the unit. You don't need to make these settings again.

TV's remote control

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

to turn the unit on.

DVB Auto Setup starts. The unit will search for the digital terrestrial channels. This takes about 5 minutes.

2

Power Save in Standby Function:

▲, ▼ to select "On", "On

Timer" or "Off", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 1

"On": It will go into the

Power Save in

Standby mode when

the unit is in standby mode.

"On Timer": Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to set the start and stop time and then press [OK].

- "Power Save in Standby" is set to activate during the setting time period.

"Off": It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode. (Quick Start mode)

The features of the "Power Save in Standby" function when the unit is in standby mode are as below.

Power Save in StandbyActivated(On/On Timer)Deactivated(Off)
Power consumptionApprox. 0.3 W*2Approx. 10 W
Quick Start*1DeactivatedActivated
Front displayTurns off(The clock display disappears.)Stays lit
Watching the picture from the digital satellite receiver connected to the AV2 terminalCannot doCan do

x1 The unit could take over 1 minute to switch ON from standby mode with Quick start deactivated. This time could be reduced to less than 10 seconds with Quick start activated. ×2 When "RF OUT (Aerial Signal)" is set to "Off" in the Setup menu (→ 76)

3

When setup has completed, the confirmation screen appears.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 3 - 1

(continued on the next page)

DRIVE SELECT TV AV VOL - + CH PAGE 1 2 3 4 5° 6 7 8 9 PROG/CHECK DELETE * 0 INPUT SELECT CHAPTER SKIP SLOW/SEARCH STOP PAUSE PLAY/X1.3 PAUSE LIVE TV EXITSTATUS GUIDE FUNCTION MENU OPTION OK RETURN MANUAL SKIP -10s +60s REC REC MODE EXT-LINK DIRECT TV REC TEXT STTL DISPLAY TIME SLIP

Tips

To cancel Auto-Setup

Press [RETURN]

If the unit displays "No stations found!" Press [▶] to select "No" and press [OK]. Go to step ②.

After you have performed steps ②-⑪, turn off the unit and confirm the cable or aerial input is connected to the RF IN terminal. Restart the Auto-Setup again (→ 71, DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality).

If the clock setting menu appears or the clock is not correct, set the clock manually (→ 14).

Restarting the Auto-Setup (→ 71, DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality)

To set the channel list best suited to your region (→ 71, DVB Auto Setup by Region)

About the screen saver function

When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver may be displayed. You can turn this function off (→ 74, Screen Saver).

4 The Owner ID settings screen appears.

▶ and press the numbered buttons to enter your choice of a 4-digit PIN number.

Owner ID PIN number ***** Name House No. Postcode RETURN: leave

- Make a note of the PIN number (don't forget). Owner ID cannot be reset by "Shipping Condition" in the setup menu. (→ 76)

5 OK to store the PIN number.

6 ◀ to select "Yes", then OK. The cursor moves to "Name".

7 ▶ to enter the name.

8 ▲, ▼ to select a letter, then ▶ to move to next character. Repeat this to enter the name.

9 OK to store the name.

10 ▼ and ▶ and then repeat steps 8, 9 to enter and store "House No." and "Postcode".

11 RETURN

The Owner ID settings screen disappears.

- Auto-Setup for your unit is complete. You can now choose your favourite channels and store them in the required order in the Favourites. (→ 70)

Tips

To correct the PIN number

  1. Press [◀, ▶] to select the digit.
  2. Press the numbered buttons to enter the digit.

To correct the character

1 Press [◀, ▶] to select the character. 2 Press [▲, ▼] to correct the character.

To display the Owner ID information on TV

Press and hold [■] on the main unit for more than 5 seconds.

The PIN number is not displayed.

After 30 seconds this menu automatically disappears.

Clock Setting

This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a day.

However, if the clock is not set correctly, you can set it manually as follows.

1 With the unit stopped, press FUNCTION MENU.

2 Use ▲, ▼ to select "Others", then press ▶.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Use ▲, ▼ to select "Others", then press ▶. - 1

3 Use ▲, ▼ to select "Setup", then press ▶.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Use ▲, ▼ to select "Setup", then press ▶. - 1

4 Use ▲, ▼ to select "Others", then press ▶.

5 Use ▲, ▼ to select "Clock", then press ▶.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Use ▲, ▼ to select "Clock", then press ▶. - 1

6 Use ▲, ▼ to select Automatic "Off", then press OK.

Clock Automatic Off Time Date 1 / 1 / 2010 Please set clock manually. OK: store RETURN: leave

7 Use ◀, ▶ to select the item you want to change.

The items change as follows: Hour←→Minute←→Second←→Day←→Month←→Year ↑

8 Use ▲, ▼ to change the setting.

You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.

9 to confirm new date and time and to initiate the clock.

10 RETURN

Tips

- If the clock is set manually, the clock does not automatically correct the time. We recommend you set "Automatic" in the Clock setting menu to "On" in step 6 (→ above).

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN]

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Usable Discs for Recording and Playback

Disc typeogoData that can be recorded and playedRewritablePlay on other players*1Recording 16:9 aspect picture*2Copy-once recording (CPRM) (⇔ 24)Standard symbol
Hard disk drive (HDD)Video Still picture Music○ -○HDD
DVD-RAMPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - To return to the previous screen - 1Video Still picture○ CPRM (⇔ 92) compatible discs only.RAM
DVD-RPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - To return to the previous screen - 2Video*3 or Still picture*3-○--R before finalisation DVD-V after finalisation (Video only)
DVD-R DL Vide PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - To return to the previous screen - 3 RDL-R DL before finalisation DVD-V after finalisation
DVD-RW Vide PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - To return to the previous screen - 4-RW(V) before finalisation DVD-V after finalisation
+RVideo--(4:3 aspect)-+R before finalisation DVD-V after finalisation
+R DLVideo--(4:3 aspect)-+R DL before finalisation DVD-V after finalisation
+RWVideo-(4:3 aspect)-+RW

○: Can do, –: Cannot do ※1 -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL Finalisation is needed for playback on other equipment (→ 69). RAM can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players. -R DL, +R DL or +RW can be played back only on equipment compatible with these discs. *2 For further information (→ 24, Notes for Recording) ※3 -R Videos and still pictures cannot be mixed on one disc. - RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW To use a new disc, formatting is necessary (→ 68). - +RW If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (→ 69). - Use of Panasonic discs is recommended. For available recording times for different discs under different recording modes, see "Recording Modes and Durations" (→ 25). - Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent you from playing or recording certain discs. - Please see specifications (→ 94) for compatible disc versions and recording speeds.

Notes

  • RAM will show an increase in available space whenever a title has been erased.
  • -RW(V) and +RW discs will only show an increase in available space when their last title has been erased.
  • -R -R DL +R +R DL The discs will show no increase in available space after deleting titles.
  • You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play them due to the condition of the recording.

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the first layer to record a programme, the remainder is recorded on the second layer. When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme.

However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.

DVD-R DL +R DL When switching layers: Video and audio may momentarily cut Second recordable layer The available space First recordable layer Title 1 Playback direction (Inner section of the disc) Title 2 (Outer section of the disc)

■Recording Modes and Durations (⇒ 25)

Play-only Discs

Disc typeLogoStandard symbolUses
DVD-Video DVD-V High Quality movie and music discs
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 2----RW(VR)DVD-RW* video recorded on another DVD recorder• You can play programmes that allow One time only recording if they have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.• By formatting (⇒ 68) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video format.• It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for recording.
DVD-RPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 3---MP3, JPEG• DVD-R* and DVD-R DL* with music recorded in MP3 (⇒ 17)• DVD-R* and DVD-R DL* with still pictures recorded in JPEG (⇒ 17)
DVD-R DLPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 4R DL
CDPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 5CD• Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW*)You can record tracks to this unit's HDD.
MP3, JPEG• CD-R* and CD-RW* with music recorded in MP3 (⇒ 17)• CD-R* and CD-RW* with still pictures recorded in JPEG (⇒ 17)• You can record tracks to this unit's HDD.
Video CDPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 6VCD• Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW*)
SVCDPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 7

* Play may be impossible on some DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of the recording. - You can play still pictures (JPEG), MP3 format data recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/RW. You can also play CD-DA, Video CD and SVCD (conforming to IEC62107) format data recorded on CD-R/RW. Close the session or finalise the disc after recording. - The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating instructions. Read the disc's instructions carefully.

Discs that Cannot be Played

• 2.6/5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm • 3.95/4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring - DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalised (⇒ 92). • Discs recorded with AVCHD format - DVD-Video with a region number other than "2" or "ALL" - DVD-Audio - Blu-ray, HD DVD - DVD-ROM, +R 8 cm, CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD • DVD-RAM with a cartridge (TYPE 1)

Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the type of connected TV

When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.

(○: Possible to view, —: Impossible to view)

TV typeDisc/Titles recorded on HDDYes/No
Multi-system TVPAL
NTSC
PAL TVPAL
NTSC *1 (PAL60)
NTSC TVPAL-
NTSC *2

*1 If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the picture will not be shown correctly. *2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (⇒ 74). - When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you match the "TV System" setting to the disc or title (PAL or NTSC) (⇒ 74).

USB memories you can use on this unit

Compatible USB memoriesUSB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP protocol:– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.•USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.•USB memories that support bulk only transfer.CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.•Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.•MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.•A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
FormatFAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.•UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.•Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.•Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Standard symbolUSB
Data that can be played or copied (⇒ below)(○: Possible, –: Impossible)
File format MP3 Still pictures (JPEG)
Playing
Copying to HDD
InstructionsYou can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto the USB memory and copy them to HDD (⇒ 38 65).You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto the USB memory and copy them to HDD or DVD-RAM (⇒ 39, 64).
  • Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
  • This unit's USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
  • If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc. is connected to this unit's USB port, you can copy the SD Video recorded with the camera to this unit's HDD or DVD-RAM.

Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)

MP3 File Information

Playable mediaHDD -R -R DL CD USB
File format MP3●Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
Number of folders (groups or albums)Maximum number of folders (groups or albums) recognizable:300 folders (groups or albums) (including the root folder)
Number of files (tracks)Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable *1:3000 files (tracks)
Bit rates 32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling frequency16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz
ID3 tagscompatible (HDD USB)

Still Picture (JPEG) Information

Playable mediaHDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB
File format JPEG●Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
Compatible pixelsBetween 34×34 and 6400×6400(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Number of folders *3 -R -R DL CD USB Maximum number of foldersrecognizable: 300 foldersHDD RAM This unit can handle a maximum of300 folders
Number of files *3 -R -R DL CD USB Maximum number of filesrecognizable *1 : 3000 filesHDD RAM This unit can handle a maximum of3000 files
MOTION JPEG PROGRESSIVE JPEGNot supported
  • If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within an MP3 file, play may not be possible. *1 Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG and other type of files is 4000. *2 It may take a few moments for still pictures to display. *3 When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not display or be playable.

Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)

Notes

HDD RAM

- Compatible formats: DCF-compliant (Content recorded on a digital camera, etc.)

Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)

-R -R DL CD

  • Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended formats) and Joliet
  • This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-R DL); however, reading or playing the disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
  • Operation may take time to complete when there are many files (tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums); some files (tracks) may not display or be playable.
  • Images recorded at a very high resolution may take a long time to display.
  • English alphabetical characters and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly. Other characters may not display correctly.
  • The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is displayed on a computer.
  • Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files (tracks) and folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order you number them. ●This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
  • Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be played.

Tips

You can play music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However, depending on the method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you number the folders.

Structure of MP3 folders

-R -R DL CD USB

Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you want to play them.

Order of play

graph TD A["Root"] --> B["001 Group"] A --> C["001.mp3"] A --> D["002.mp3"] A --> E["003.mp3"] A --> F["002 Group"] A --> G["003 Group"] G --> H["001.mp3"] G --> I["002.mp3"] G --> J["003.mp3"] G --> K["004.mp3"] G --> L["001.mp3"] G --> M["002.mp3"] G --> N["003.mp3"]

Structure of still pictures (folders) -R -R DL CD USB

Files inside a folder are displayed in the order they were updated or taken.

Order of play

graph TD A["Root"] --> B["002 Folder"] A --> C["003 Folder"] A --> D["004 Folder"] B --> E["P0000001.jpg"] B --> F["P0000002.jpg"] C --> G["P0000003.jpg"] C --> H["P0000004.jpg"] C --> I["P0000005.jpg"] D --> J["P0000006.jpg"] D --> K["P0000007.jpg"]

RAM

Folders can be created on other equipment.

* These folders cannot be selected as a copying destination. - If a folder name or file name has been input using other equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to play or edit the data.

Rootgraph TD A["XXXX****.jpg"] --> B["JPEG"] B --> C["DCIM"] C --> D["****XXXX"] D --> E["XXXX****.jpg"] F["DCIM"] --> G["****XXXX"] G --> H["XXXX****.jpg"]

Inserting Disc/USB memory

Inserting Discs

① Press [▲ OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.

- Insert a disc.

Insert label-up.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a disc mounted on a base plate with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

② Press [▲ OPEN/CLOSE] to close tray.

Notes

  • Ensure the disc is flat in the tray
  • When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.
  • RAM It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.

Automatic drive select function

DVD-V VCD

  • If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
  • If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is automatically selected.

Inserting/Removing the USB memory

Inserting the USB memoryPure mechanical component diagram without any text, numbers, or symbols

  • Before inserting any USB memory to this unit, ensure that the data stored therein has been backed up.
  • Check the orientation of the USB connector and insert it straight in.
  • Insert a USB device while the unit is stopped, so the "USB device" screen is displayed. Select an item, then press [OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (⇒ 38, 64).

Removing the USB memory

  • Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory straight out.
  • If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may be damaged.

Refer to "GUIDE Plus+ system" (⇒ 33) for detail information.

This DVD recorder has a tuner which allows it to directly receive and record digital terrestrial channels.

Preparation:

- Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the connections to this unit.

Important:

This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

to turn the unit on.

2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 1

- The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.

Sun 10/10/10 19:45 Sun 10th 19:30-20:00 Time: BBC 1 BBC 2 TV 1 Channel 4 Channel 5 TV 2 MAC +24 Options English - In today's show we still... 19:30 20:00 20:30 21:00 East... Hot Wars Holiday Programme Lmm... Conversion Street The Bill Papel Chart Show News Sea and the City Termination 2 We out of he…

3

▲, ▼ to select the current programme, then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 3 - 1

4

▲, ▼ to select "View", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 4 - 1

Selecting a Channel without the GUIDE Plus+ system

To select desired channel

Press [∧ ∨ CH].

To directly enter Channels

You can also select channels with the numbered buttons.

  • Regarding Digital Channel Information (→ 45)
  • If New Channel Message appears (→ 46)
  • To select Audio Description, Digital Teletext and subtitles (→ 45) • To change DVB Multi Audio (→ 67, DVB Multi Audio)

Notes

- The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed immediately after initial tuning is done.

Watching Digital Satellite Programmes

You can view the digital satellite programmes via this unit by the following method when "Power Save in Standby" is activated, and the digital satellite receiver is not connected to TV.

Preparation:

  • Connect a digital satellite receiver to this unit's AV2 input terminals (→ 11). • Turn on the digital satellite receiver.
  • Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the connections to this unit.

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

to turn the unit on.

2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 1

to select "AV2".

DRIVE SELECT TV + VOL - AV PAGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DELETE 0 INPUT * SKIP SLOW/SEARCH STOP PAUSE PLAY/x1.3 PAUSE LIVE TV EXITSTATUS GUIDE OK FUNCTION MENU OPTION RETURN MANUAL SKIP -10s +60s REC EXT LINK RIBK OUTV REC TEXT STTL DISPLAY TIME SLIP

Tips

- When "Power Save in Standby" is deactivated (⇒ 76), you can watch the digital satellite programme without turning the unit on.

Notes

- You cannot watch digital satellite programmes during timer recording.

Preparation:

- Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the connections to this unit.

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs

Refer to "Advanced Playback" (⇒ 36–37) for detail information.

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR) VCD CD

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

to turn the unit on.

2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 1

to select the HDD or DVD drive.

3

If you selected the DVD drive

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 3 - 1

to open the tray (Button located on front of the unit).

- Insert a disc ( ⇒ 18) and press [▲ OPEN/CLOSE] again to close the tray.

4

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 4 - 1

Stopping Play

Press [■].

- The stopped position is memorized. (Resume play function)

- (Except for HDD) The stopped position is cleared when you press [■] several times.

Pausing Play

Press [11].

- Press again to restart play.

DVD-V VCD

Generally, menu screens that appear on the TV may be navigated as follows: e.g.,

DVD TOP MENU Play Subtitles Chapter List Trailer

DVD-V

▲, ▼, ◀, ► to select an item, then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DVD-V - 1

You can sometimes use the numbered buttons to select an item.

VCD

Press the numbered buttons to select an item.

e.g., "5":

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - VCD - 1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - VCD - 2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - VCD - 3

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - VCD - 4

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - VCD - 5

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - VCD - 6

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - VCD - 7

DRIVE SELECT TV + VOL AV PAGE CH PROG/CHECK DELETE * 0 INPUT SELECT CHAPTER SKIP SLOW/SEARCH STOP PAUSE PLAY/x1.3 PAUSE LIVE TV EXITSTATUS GUIDE FUNCTION MENU OPTION RETURN MANUAL SKIP -10s+60s REC EXT LINK/BIO/BOTUB/REC

Tips

To return to the menu screen

DVD-V

  1. Press [OPTION].
  2. Press [▲, ▼] to select "Top Menu" or "Menu" and press [OK].

VCD

Press [RETURN]

Notes

- HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

Playback starts from the most recent recording.

DVD-V VCD

Playback starts from the point specified by the disc.

CD

Playback starts from the beginning of the disc.

- Depending on the disc type, playing may automatically start without pressing [▶] (PLAY).

●The unit takes some time to read the disc before play starts.

- DISCS CONTINUE TO ROTATE WHILE MENUS ARE DISPLAYED. Press [■] when you finish to preserve the unit's motor and your television screen.

- If "⊗" appears on the TV, the operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.

Refer to "Notes for Recording" (⇒ 24) and "Advanced Recording" (⇒ 25–27) for detailed information on recording.

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

Preparation:

  • Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the connections to this unit.
  • RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (⇒ 68).

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

to turn the unit on.

2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 1

to select the HDD or DVD drive.

3

RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW If you selected the DVD drive

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 3 - 1

to open the tray (Button located on front of the unit).

  • Insert a disc with enough remaining blank space and press [▲ OPEN/CLOSE] again to close the tray.
  • When the format confirmation screen is displayed (→ 26).

4

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 4 - 1

to select desired channel.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 4 - 2

  • To select with the numbered buttons (→ 19).
  • When no channel setting is performed on the unit and broadcast is recorded directly from the digital satellite receiver, select a channel on the connected equipment, then press [INPUT SELECT] to select "AV2".

5

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 5 - 1

to select the recording

mode. (→ 25)

Recording Mode Rec Mode Remain XP 47:47 SP 95:34 LP 191:11 EP 381:16

6

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 6 - 1

to start recording.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 6 - 2

Elapsed recording time

Pausing Recording

Press [11].

- Press again to restart recording. (The title is not divided.)

Stopping Recording

Press [■].

Tips

- If a programme to record has subtitles, Audio Description or multiple audio, you can record with these items. They cannot be switched after recording.

- To record with subtitles

Before starting the recording, show the subtitles (⇒ 45). If the programme has multiple subtitle, select the desired language (⇒ 71).

- To record with Audio Description

Before starting the recording, turn on the Audio Description and set the volume (⇒ 45).

- To record with the selected audio

Before starting the recording, select the desired audio channel or language, if the programme has multiple audio channels or languages (see 67, 71).

● To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):

Set the "Audio Mode for XP Recording" to "LPCM" in the Setup menu (see 73).

DRIVE SELECT TV + VOL AV - CH PAGE ↑ CH ▼ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PROG/CHECK DELETE 0 INPUT ← SKIP — SLOW/SEARCH STOP PAUSE PLAY/x13 PAUSE LIVE TV EXITSTATUS GUIDE FUNCTION MENU DIRECT NAVICATOR OK OPTION MANUAL SKIP + -10s +60s MANUAL SKIP - REC REC MODE EXT LINKREDBACODE REC TEXT STTL DISPLAY TIME SLIP

Notes

  • RAM -RW(V) -R +RW: To use a new disc, formatting is necessary. (see 26, 68)
  • -R +RW(V) +R +RW: It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to complete recording management information after recording finishes.
  • You cannot change the channel or recording mode during recording.
  • This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
  • -R Video cannot be recorded to DVD-R discs with JPEG images already recorded on them.
  • Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to record. (see 24)

What is FREEVIEW+?

FREEVIEW+ is the functions that enable timer recordings to be controlled by the signal sent from the broadcaster. "Guide Link", "Series recording" (see 34), and "Split Programme" are available.

"Guide Link" – If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording's start and stop times can be controlled by the broadcaster, e.g. delayed start.

This is indicated by "Guide Link" in the Timer Recording screen in step ② (see below).

"Split Programme" – If a programme is separated into 2 or more parts by some other programmes e.g. news, this unit pauses recording during the gap.

This is indicated by "Split" in the Timer Recording screen in step ② (⇒ below). When setting a timer from the 1st split programme, other parts of the programme will be automatically set and indicated by the timer mark on the TV Guide, but not shown on the timer recording list.

If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording's start and stop times are controlled by the signal sent from the broadcaster. If the signal is not sent correctly, the recording may lack the beginning or the ending part of the programmes. In order to make the timer recording work successfully, we recommend you set the start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes, up to a maximum of 10 minutes for Guide Link to function.

e.g. When you set the timer recording for a programme that will start at 10:00 and end at 11:00, set "9:58" and "11:05" in step ③ (⇒ below).

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

Preparation:

  • Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the connections to this unit.
  • Turn on this unit.
  • If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you use for recording (⇒ 15).
  • RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (→ 68).
  • Confirm that the clock on the unit's display is set to the correct time.

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

- The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.

② ▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the future programme, then OK

TV Guide Calendar, Sun 10/10/10, 18:45, BBC 2, Holiday Programme. Time listings from 10:00 to 299:30.

"Guide Link", "Split" and "Series" are displayed here.

- If "Selection Screen" appears, press [▲, ▼] to select "Single Timer Rec.", then press [OK]. Refer to "Series recording" (⇒ 34) for "Series Timer Rec.".

3 Confirm the programme (start and end time) by TV magazine, etc. and correct if necessary using

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 3

  • The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
  • The timer icon is displayed.
  • The "💡" lights on the unit's display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.
  • Repeat steps ②–③ to programme other recordings.
  • Press [⏻] to turn the unit off.

- "Guide Link" will not be displayed and will not function under the following conditions.

  • Timer programmes set manually (⇒ 30). – Timer programmes set from the TV Guide are modified or start/stop time changed by more than 10 minutes from original time. (Series): Series recording (⇒ 34) is set. (Split): The programme is split in two or more parts by other programmes. This unit pauses recording during the gap between the parts of the programme.

Remote control buttons: DRIVE, SELECT, TV, +, VOL, -, AV, PAGE, 1 2 3, 4 5 6, 7 8 9, DELETE, *, SKIP, 0, INPUT, SELECT, CHAPTER, SLOW/SEARCH, STOP, PAUSE, PLAY/X13, PAUSE/LIVE TV, EXIT STATUS, GUIDE, FUNCTION MENU, RETURN, OPTION, MANUAL SKIP, -10s -60s.

Tips

●To check programmes (⇒ 31) • To cancel a timer recording

programming

1 Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the programme (the timer icon is displayed) and press [OK]. 2 While "Delete" is selected, press [OK]. 3 Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes" and press [OK]. - The timer icon disappears.

- To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):

Set the "Audio Mode for XP Recording" to "LPCM" in the Setup menu (⇒ 73)

Notes

  • RAM -RW(V) +R +RW To use a new disc, formatting is necessary. (→ 26, 68) ●The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed immediately after initial tuning is done ●The GUIDE Plus+ system will not work if the clock is not set correctly.
  • If "NTSC" has been selected for "TV System" (⇒ 74), the GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be used.
  • "FR" recording mode is not available when the timer programme is controlled by "Guide Link". ●The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible via the aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
  • If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other timer recordings, the "Overlapped Timer Recording" screen appears to help you resolve the overlapping.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

- Simultaneous recording to HDD and DVD is not possible.

Preparation:

  • Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the connections to this unit.
  • RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (→ 68).
  • If deleting titles from a disc, insert the disc containing the programme to be deleted.

Important:

Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

DELETE Navigator

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

to select the HDD or DVD drive.

2

With the unit stopped

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 1

DIGA FUNCTION MENU: HDD, Playback, Recording, Delete, Copy, TV Guide, Others, Drive Select, *ICAM, Remain 30:00 SP, Video, Picture, Music.

3

▲, ▼ to select "Delete", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 3 - 1

4

▲, ▼ to select "Video", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 4 - 1

DIGA FUNCTION MENU: REDAV 32:00 SP, Playback, Recording, Delete, Copy, Tx Guide, Share, Drive Select, Video, Picture, Movie.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 4 - 3

DELETE Navigator Grouped Titles: HOG, HOG, Previous, Page 0202, Next, OPTION, Select Info, Pre Slovenia Next.

5

▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the title, then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 5 - 1

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

Press [11] again to cancel.

6

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 6 - 1

7

◀ to select "Delete", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 7 - 1

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN]

To view other pages

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK].

- You can also press [◀◀, ▶▶] to view other pages.

Deleting Titles During Playback

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

1

During playback

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

2

◀ to select "Delete", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 1

Remote control buttons: DRIVE, SELECT, TV, +, VOL, -, AV, PAGE, 1 2 3, 4 5 6, 7 8 9, PROG/CHECK, DELETE, *, 0 INPUT, SELECT, SKIP SLOW/SEARCH, STOP PAUSE PLAY/x1.3, PAUSE LIVE TV, GUIDE FUNCTION MENU, OPTION RETURN, MANUAL SKIP, -10s +90s, REC EXT-LINK/RE/MOTUB/REC.

Notes

  • You cannot delete while recording or copying.
  • +R +R DL +RW Even if you have set protection on other equipment, such titles are deleted.
  • -R -R DL +R -RW(V) +R DL It is not possible to delete contents from finalised discs.

Tips

  • HDD RAM Deleting an item increases the available disc space by the amount of space taken by the item deleted.
  • -R -R DL +R +R DL Available disc space does not increase after deletion.
  • -RW(V) +RW Available disc space increases when you delete the last title.
  • HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW To recover total disc space, the disc needs to be formatted. (→ 68)
  • HDD You can press [STATUS] to display the "Properties" screen when a title with "Info" on the bottom of the All Titles or Grouped Titles screen is selected. (⇒ 50)

Selecting audio for recording

Broadcast in multi-channel sound:

You can select audio language when received audio in multi-channel broadcast ("Multi Audio" appears at the bottom of digital channel information display).

However, audio cannot be switched after recording.

Hello Hola Hallo. Select the language you want to see in the display.

About the aspect when recording a programme

HDD | RAM (When "Recording Format" is set to "Video format") -R | -RW(V)

The original aspect used for the source programme will also be used with the recording.

However, in the following case, programme will be recorded in 4:3.

- -R -RW(V) Programme recorded using "EP" or "FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)" recording modes will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.

HDD RAM (When "Recording Format" is set to "VR format")

The programme will be recorded in the original aspect.

+R +RW

The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - +R +RW - 1

When you want to copy titles in high speed mode from the HDD to DVD-R, etc.

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Set "Recording Format" to "Video format" before recording to the HDD.

(The default setting is "Video format". ⇒ 72)

You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X° ); however, the audio and aspect settings ( ⇔ above) are necessary before recording to the HDD.

* Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.

Record to the HDD

graph LR A["HDD"] --> B["High speed copy to DVD-R, etc."]

In the following cases, high speed mode does not work.

  • +R +R DL +RW Titles recorded in "EP" mode and "FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)" mode • +R +R DL +RW Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
  • -R -R DL -RW(V) Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using "EP" mode or "FR" (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode

Copy-once recording

It is not possible to record broadcasts that allow "one time only recording" onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW, or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (see page 92) compatible DVD-RAM.

CPRM compatible discs only.12 cm HDD

-R -RW(V) +R +RW (○: Can do, -: Cannot do)PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Copy-once recording - 2

  • "One time only recording" titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (they are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
  • Even when copying to videotape, the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
  • You cannot copy a Playlist (Video) created from "one time only recording" titles.

Playing the disc on other DVD players

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

The disc must be finalized after recording or copying (see page 69).

It is necessary to finalize DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them in the same way as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.*

* You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.

graph LR A["Record to DVD-R, etc."] --> B["Finalise"] B --> C["Play on other DVD equipment"]

+RW

If the disc fails to play on other equipment, we recommend you create a top menu (see page 69). However, even with a top menu, +RW may not play on other players.

Recording to DVD-R DL and +R DL

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

- It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.

Recording Modes and Durations

Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated. (The times provided on this table are an estimate.)

Recording ModeHDD(320 GB)DVD-RAM DVD-RDVD-RW+R+RW(4.7 GB)DVD-R DL *3 (8.5 GB)+R DL *3 (8.5 GB)
Single-sided(4.7 GB)Double-sided *1 (9.4 GB)
XP(High quality)71 hours 1 hour2 hours 1 hour1 hour 45 minutes1 hour 45 minutes
SP(Standard play)142 hours 2 hours4 hours 2 hours3 hours 35 minutes3 hours 35 minutes
LP(Long play)284 hours 4 hours8 hours 4 hours7 hours 10 minutes7 hours 10 minutes
EP(Extra long play) *4 567 hours(426 hours *2 ) (6*2) hours16 ( 12*2 )hours (6*2) hours14 hours 20 minutes(10 hours 45 minutes *2 )
FR(Flexible Recording) *4 567 hours maximum8 hours maximum16 hours maximum8 hours maximum14 hours 20 minutesApproximately 9 hours with video quality equivalent to LP mode.

*1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.

*2 When "Recording time in EP mode" has been set to "EP (6hours)" in the Setup menu (⇔ 72). The sound quality is better when using "EP (6hours)" than when using "EP (8hours)".

*3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying. +R DL You cannot copy in "EP" or "FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)" mode.

*4 When recording to the HDD in "EP" or "FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)" mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs.

| Picture quality | Recording time | | :--- | :--- | | XP | | | SP | | | LP | | | EP (6hours) *2 | | | EP (8hours) | |

Notes

  • This unit uses variable bit rate (VBR) recording which varies the amount of data recorded to suit the picture quality, so actual recording times and remaining recording times shown by the unit will be different. (-R DL +R DL The difference will be especially noticeable.) Use a disc with enough remaining blank space.
  • When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8hours) mode, play may not be possible on DVD players, even if they are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6hours) mode.

Tips

●Maximum number of titles to a disc

HDD 499 titles on HDD

RAM -R -RW(V) 99 titles on a disc

+R +RW 49 titles on a disc

●FR (Flexible recording mode)

Using "Flexible Recording" is convenient in these kinds of situations:

RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

- When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an appropriate recording mode difficult

- When you want to record a long programme with the best picture quality possible

HDD

- When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording mode when copying, to fit the disc space

e.g., Recording a 90-minute programme to 4.7 GB DVD-RAM disc:

- If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit on one disc.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD - 1

A second disc is necessary for 30-minutes of the programme.

- If you select SP mode, the programme will fit on one disc.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD - 2

However there will be 30-minutes remaining disc space.

- If you select "Flexible Recording" the programme will fit on one disc perfectly.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD - 3

You can set FR mode when programming timer recordings and flexible recording ( ⇒ 27).

When the format confirmation screen is displayed

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment.

Important:

Formatting permanently deletes all disc contents (including the contents that have been recorded on a PC), regardless of protection status of disc.

RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

The following screen may appear when inserting a new disc or a disc that has been recorded on another equipment.

Only format the disc if you intend to use it for recording.

Format: This disc is not formatted properly. Do you want to format the disc now? Yes No. SELECT OK RECORD.

Do not format if you intend to view pre-recorded titles or contents from the disc.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW - 2

to select "Yes", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW - 3

Tips

Refer to "Formatting Discs" ( ⇒ 68) for more detail of formatting.

When removing a Recorded or Copied Disc

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

After recording or copying, if you press [▲ OPEN/CLOSE] to eject the disc, the following screen may appear.

Finalise

Finalise the disc so that it can be played on other DVD players. Note: Recording or editing is not possible after finalising. This may take up to ○ mi

Press the REC button to start finalising. Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit. This disc cannot be played on other DVD players without finalising.

Finalising

DVD-R, etc. recorded or copied on this unit cannot be

played on other players immediately after recording or copying. Using the Finalise feature allows you to play these discs on other players.

Once the disc is finalised, you will no longer be able to record onto the disc.

[However, if you format the DVD-RW, you can record and copy onto the disc again. ( ⇒ 68)]

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Finalising - 1

to start finalising.

or

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - or - 1

to eject the disc without

finalising.

Notes

- You cannot stop finalising once you have started it.

Tips

  • If you want to provide the disc with a name or set play menu select, select "Disc Name" ( ⇒ 68), "Auto-Play Select" ( ⇒ 69) or "Top Menu" ( ⇒ 69) in "DVD Management" before finalising.
  • Refer to "Finalising" (=> 69) for more detail on finalising.

Specifying the Recording Time — One Touch Recording

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

This function allows you to specify the recording time up to 4 hours.

During recording

On the main unit only

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - During recording - 1

Press repeatedly until the desired time

is reached.

– The recording time and the unit's display change as follows:

graph TD A["Counter (Cancel)"] --> B["OFF0:30"] B --> C["OFF1:00"] D["OFF4:00"] --> E["OFF1:30"] F["OFF3:00"] <--_G["OFF2:00"] G --> H["↓"]

Notes

  • This function does not work during timer recording or Flexible Recording.
  • Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press [■].
  • This unit turns to standby mode when it is not operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch Recording, if "Auto Standby after OTR" is set to "On" in the Setup menu. (Default setting: "On") (=> 76)

Direct TV Recording

HDD

This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV without having to change the channels on this unit.

You can use the function when you connect the unit to a Q Link compatible TV using a 21-pin Scart cable.

You can also use this function using VIERA Link. (→ 43)

DIRECT TV REC

Press and hold for about 1

second.

– The titles are recorded to the HDD.

Tips

To stop recording

Press [■].

Notes

  • When the Digital Teletext (→ 45) is displayed, Direct TV recording is unavailable.
  • If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV recording, the Direct TV recording stops.
  • When "EXT-L" lights on the unit's display (→ 28), Direct TV recording is unavailable.

Flexible Recording

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the programme within the remaining disc space.

The recording mode becomes FR mode. Refer to "FR (Flexible recording mode)" (=> 25).

Preparation:

  • Select the channel or the external input to record.
  • Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

1 With the unit stopped

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - With the unit stopped - 1

2 Use ▲, ▼ to select "Others", then press OK. 3 Use ▲, ▼ to select "Flexible Rec", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - With the unit stopped - 2

Flexible Rec: Record in FR mode. Maximum rec. time 8 hour 00 min. Set rec. time 8 hour 00 min. Start Cancel. SELECT RETURN.

4 Use ◀, ▶ to select "hour" and "min." and ▲, ▼ to set the recording time.

- You can set "hour" and "min." using the numbered buttons.

5 When you want to start recording, use ▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select "Start", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - With the unit stopped - 4

- Recording starts.

Notes

- You cannot record more than 8 hours.

Tips

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

To stop recording partway

Press [■].

To show the remaining recording time

Press [STATUS ⓘ] to show the remaining recording time.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Tips - 1

Remaining time

Playing while you are recording

Chasing Playback

HDD RAM

Allows playback from the beginning of the title you are recording.

During recording

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - During recording - 1

Tips

To stop play

Press [■] once.

To stop recording

2 seconds after play stops, press [■].

To stop timer recording

2 seconds after play stops, 1 Press [■] 2 Press [◀, ▶] to select "Stop Recording", then press [OK].

Simultaneous Record and Playback

HDD RAM

Allows playback of a previous title, while recording something else.

- You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press [DRIVE SELECT].

1 During recording

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - During recording - 1

② [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the title to

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - During recording - 2

Tips

To stop play

Press [■].

To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To stop recording

After play stops

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen. 2 Press [■]. 3 If the recording stop confirmation screen is displayed, press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes" or "Stop Recording" and press [OK] to stop recording.

Notes

- During playing while you are recording, you cannot edit or delete titles.

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

Manual Recording

Preparation:

  • RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (=> 68).
  • Connect a digital satellite receiver to this unit's AV2 input terminals (=> 11).
  • Set the "AV2 Input" to match the connected equipment in the Setup menu (=> 75).
  • When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC, change the "TV System" to "NTSC" in the Setup menu (=> 74).

① With the unit stopped

INPUT SELECT to select "AV2" for the digital satellite receiver you have connected.

2 DRIVE SELECT to select the HDD or DVD drive.

- If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (see page 18).

3 REC MODE to select the recording mode.

4 Select the channel on the digital satellite receiver.

5 REC to start recording.

Tips

To skip unwanted parts

Press [11] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)

To stop recording

Press [■].

Notes

- This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD).

To record programmes from a SKY Digital STB/digital satellite receiver using timer programming

Preparation:

  • RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (see page 68).
  • Make sure you connect the AV2 terminal of this unit to "VCR Scart Terminal" of a SKY Digital STB/digital satellite receiver with a 21-pin scart cable (=> 11).
  • Set the "AV2 Input" and "Ext Link" to match the connected equipment in the Setup menu (=> 75).

1 Make timer programming on SKY Digital STB/digital satellite receiver.

– Refer to the equipment's operating instructions.

2 DRIVE SELECT to select the HDD or DVD drive.

- If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc (=> 18).

  • The unit turns off and "EXT-L" lights on the unit's display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.
  • While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, most operations on this unit are prohibited ([▲ OPEN/CLOSE], [⏻/I] etc.).

Tips

To cancel the external control

Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer recording standby (The unit turns on and "EXT-L" disappears.).

Manual timer recordings (=> 30)

Notes

  • In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to cancel the setting after recording is finished.
  • This function does not work when "TV System" is set to "NTSC" in the Setup menu (→ 74).
  • This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the equipment's operating instructions.
  • The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some cases.
  • When "Ext Link" is set to "Ext Link 2", this function does not work if the input signal is NTSC system.
  • Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer recording are close to each other. HDD RAM To divide the titles, go to "Divide Title" (→ 48).
  • When this unit is in EXT LINK standby ("EXT-L" is shown on the unit's display), the TV Guide cannot be downloaded.
  • While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, AV1 output terminal outputs the signal which is input from the AV2 input terminal irrespective of "AV1 Output" setting (→ 75).
  • During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is only available from the drive performing the recording.
  • When "EXT-L" lights on the unit's display, Direct TV Recording is unavailable.

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

● Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.

This unit VIDEO LAXONO-AUDIO-R K21K. Audio/video cable. Other video equipment. Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.

* Connect to terminals of the same colour.

  • If the audio output of the external device is monaural, connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
  • Refer to "Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette Recorder" when connecting to the AV2 input terminals on the rear panel. (78)

Notes

  • When timer recording starts while recording from an external device, timer recording takes priority and recording from the external device stops.
  • If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then the video quality will be degraded.

Preparation:

  • Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
  • Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode (→ 25).
  • When the output signal from the external device is NTSC, change the "TV System" to "NTSC" in the Setup menu (→ 74). This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
  • To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set "Input NR" to "On" in the on-screen display (→ 67).

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

to select the input where the external device is connected.

- Front panel inputs are AV3.

2

Start play on the external device.

3

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 3 - 1

at the point you want to start recording.

Tips

To skip unwanted parts

Press [11] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)

To stop recording

Press [■].

- Using Flexible Recording (⇒ 27), you can record the content of a video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.

Notes

- Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so treated cannot be recorded using this unit.

Manual timer recordings

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

Preparation:

  • Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the connections to this unit.
  • RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (⇒ 68).
  • When recording to a disc, insert a disc with enough remaining blank space.
  • Confirm that the clock on the unit's display is set to the correct time.
  • If connected via a digital satellite receiver, please ensure before a timer recording starts the required channel is set on the digital satellite receiver.

1PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Preparation: - 1

Timer Recording: No. Channel Date Start Stop HDD 30:24 SP DVD 1:58 SP. SUN 10/16/10 12:53:30. New Timer Programme. Press OK to store new programme.

2

▲, ▼ to select "New Timer

Programme", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Preparation: - 3

- If "New Timer Programme" is already selected, press [OK].

3

◀, ▶ to move through the items and ▲, ▼ to set the items.

Time Recording: HDD Rate SP DVD 1:58 SP. SUN 10/10/10 12:54:00. Channel Date Start Stop A HDD Mode STTL. All Channels. Programme Name. Please set Channel. Change. Category. Kumber.

Channel:

  • TV Station Name/External Input
  • When recording digital satellite programmes, select "AV2".
  • You can press the "Blue" button to change the category. [e.g., Free Channels, Radio, Registered Favourites (→ 70, Favourites Edit)]

Date:

- You can set a daily or weekly programme (→ right, Tips).

Start (start time)/Stop (end time):

- Hold button to change in 30-minute increments or decrements.

Drive:

  • HDD or DVD. When the recording drive is "DVD" and there is not enough remaining space, recording automatically switches to the "HDD" (⇔ 32).

Mode:

- Recording mode (⇒ 25)

STTL [Subtitles (⇒ 45)*, *2]:

- AUTO/OFF

AD [Audio Description (⇒ 45) *1, *3]:

- AUTO/OFF

RENEW (HDD):

– Auto Renewal Recording (⇒ 32) ON/OFF

Programme Name:

Press [OK] (⇔ 46, Entering Text).

*1 If "AUTO" is selected, and if the programme includes the information of subtitles or Audio Description, they are automatically recorded with the programme. *2 When there are multiple languages, select the subtitle language. (⇒ 71, DVB Preferred Subtitles) *3 You can switch the Audio Description and change its volume during timer recording.

4PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Mode: - 1

- The timer icon is displayed in the left column.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Mode: - 2

  • The "💡" lights on the unit's display to indicate that timer recording standby has been activated.
  • Repeat steps ②–④ to programme other recordings.
  • Press [⏻] to turn the unit off.

Notes

  • The "💡" on the unit's display flashes when the unit cannot go into timer recording standby.
  • If two timer recording times overlap, the first recording always has priority. The second recording will start only after the first recording has finished.
  • Recorded subtitles cannot be deleted later.
  • A timer recording will not start while a disc is being formatted, deleted, or finalised. The recording begins afterwards.
  • When "Channel" is set in "AV1", "AV2", "AV3", or "STTL" and the "AD" setting is unavailable.
  • Recorded Audio Description cannot be deleted.

Tips

To exit the timer recording list

Press [PROG/CHECK].

- "Date" Setting

Each press of [▲] changes items in the order below. (Each press of [▼] changes items in the reverse order.)

Current date → ---→ One month later

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Tips - 1

Weekly timer Daily timer

Titles recorded using the same daily, weekly or series timer are bundled and displayed as a "group" in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (⇒ 36) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.

  • You can also use the numbered buttons to enter "Channel", "Date", "Start" and "Stop".
  • You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to switch the drive, [REC MODE] to switch "Mode" and press [STTL] to switch "STTL".

Language for broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle

In timer recording of broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle, audio and subtitle language to be recorded will follow the setting of "DVB Preferred Multi Audio" and "DVB Preferred Subtitles" in the Setup menu (⇒ 71)

To cancel a timer recording in progress

Preparation:

- Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the connections to this unit.

1 While the unit is onPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Preparation: - 1

– Confirmation screen appears.

2

◀ to select "Stop Recording", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Preparation: - 2

Notes

- Recording stops and the timer programme is deleted. (Daily, weekly and series timer programmes remain and timer recording will start from the next time the timer recording is set.)

If the "Overlapped Timer Recording" screen appears

If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other timer recordings using the GUIDE Plus+ system, the "Overlapped Timer Recording" screen appears to help you eliminate the overlapping. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or Resolve Overlapping

The timer recording list can be viewed even when the unit is off.

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

then ▲, ▼ to select the programme.

Timer Recording: HDD Rate 04 SP DVD 1:58 SP. SUN 10/10/10 12:54:00. No. Channel Date Start Stop. New Timer P. HDD. DVD. Mode STTL AD. Drive space. A B C. Press OK to align new programme.

Ⓐ Timer Recording screen icons

②: Timer programme is active.

●: Currently recording

: Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the programme with the later start time starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.

- You stopped a daily, weekly or series timer recording. The icon disappears the next time the timer recording starts recording.

: The disc was full. (not enough space)

The TV programme may not be recorded due to copy-protect.

x: Recording stopped (Dirty disc, etc.)

Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording (→ 32).

Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD (Displayed while recording.)

HDD Recording drive is set to HDD

DVD Recording drive is set to DVD

B Drive space

OK: Recordable

→ (Date): For daily or weekly timer recordings, the display will show until when recordings can be made (up to one month ahead from the present time) based on the time remaining on the disc.

!: It may not be possible to record because:

the disc is write-protected.

  • there is no more space left.
  • the number of possible titles has reached its maximum.
  • programmes are overlapped.
  • the timer programme is deactivated.

Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to the HDD.

© Channel name, programme name and other information are displayed.

2a

to delete.

- You cannot delete programmes that are currently recording.

2b

to modify the programme.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2b - 1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2b - 2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2b - 3

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2b - 4

make changes,

then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2b - 5

2c

When a programme with ⏻ is selected

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2c - 1

  • If the programme was set from the TV Guide, the available repeat programmes are displayed. Press [▲, ▼] to select, then press [OK].
  • If the on-screen instructions do not appear, change or delete the overlapped programme.

Tips

- You can enter up to 32 programmes a month in advance.

You can also delete a programme with the following steps.

1 Press [▲, ▼] to select the programme and press [OPTION]. 2 Press [▲, ▼] to select "Delete" and press [OK].

To exit the timer recording list

Press [PROG/CHECK].

Notes

  • Recording may fail if there are changes to the station's programming.
  • The indicator light disappears from the unit's display when no timer programme is set or when all timer programmes are deactivated.
  • “----” is displayed on a series recording item if there will be no episode of the series for the next 8 days. We recommend you delete the “----” item after you confirm the last episode of the series is recorded.
  • The "Guide Link" function may not work if you manually change the start/end time by over 10 minutes.
  • Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.

To deactivate timer programme (e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer programming)

After performing step ① (⇒ left)

2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 1

(Red)

  • The indicator light (⇨ left) disappears from the timer recording list.
  • Press the "Red" button again to activate timer programme.

Tips

You can also deactivate the timer programme using the following procedure.

Perform step ① (→ left) 1 Press [OPTION] 2 Press [▲, ▼] to select "Timer Off", then press [OK].

Relief Recording

RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

When the recording drive is "DVD" and there is not enough remaining blank space, recording automatically switches to the "HDD". If there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on, or when timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be altered to the HDD.

  • The DIRECT NAVIGATOR shows which programmes were relief-recorded ("is displayed.) (→ 36).
  • If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.

Auto Renewal Recording

HDD

If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly every day or every week using timer recording, or if you record a programme of a series onto HDD repeatedly using Series timer recording, the unit will record the new programme over the old one.

This function can be used only when daily, weekly, or series timer recording is selected.

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD - 1

2

Use ▲, ▼ to select the programme, then press OK.

3

◀, ▶ to select "RENEW" column.

4

▲, ▼ to select "ON", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD - 3

Timer Recording HDD RENKIN SP DVD 1:58 SP SUN 10/10/10 12:54:00 Channel Date Start Stop HDD Mode STTL AR RENEW 1 BBC 1 SUN 22:00 22:30 HDD SP OFF OFF Oh All Channels: BBC 1 Programme Name

Notes

  • If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or while playback is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto Renewal Recording takes place.
  • Playlists (Video) made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
  • When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may not be recorded completely.

Making timer recordings on the television

HDD

To make a timer recording with your television, connect to a television with a Q Link function (⇒ 43) that you can use for setting timer recordings using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (⇒ 10,11).

1

Make timer programming on the TV.

2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD - 1

to turn the unit off.

- The start and end of recording is controlled by TV. - The titles are recorded to the HDD.

Tips

To stop recording

Press [■].

Notes

  • When this unit is in EXT LINK standby ("EXT-L" on the unit's display lights), recording from TV does not start.
  • Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer recording are close to each other.

To divide the titles, go to "Divide Title" (⇒ 48).

Notes on timer recording

  • When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded using a different TV system (PAL/NTSC) cannot be played unless the TV system is changed in the Setup menu (⇒ 74) or the timer recording has completed or has been cancelled.
  • Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is turned on/off.
  • Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when playing.
  • Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal speed mode (⇒ 57).
  • If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically. You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
  • When you programme successive timer recordings to start immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at the beginning of the later programmes.

Programme Programme Not recorded Recorded Recorded

What is the GUIDE Plus+ system?

The GUIDE Plus+ system gives you an overview of digital television and radio programmes up to 7 days in advance. For many of these programmes, you can select additional information provided by the stations. You can search the programme preview according to various topics such as sport, films etc., according to categories such as TV or radio. Also, you can search for programmes using programme information such as programme names etc. You can easily find the desired programmes and set Timer recording.

graph TD A["Broadcast date"] --> B["Advertisement"] B --> C["Timer icon (→ 22)"] C --> D["Selected programme"] D --> E["Profile view"] E --> F["Logo of the Gemstar branding partner"] F --> G["Timeline: 10 Channel 4-1"] G --> H["Time: 18:30 20:00 20:30 21:00"] H --> I["BBC 1 Fast... D.I.Y. SOS Red Ca…

Landscape view:

The GUIDE Plus+ system offers detailed information as if you see a TV programme magazine.

This is convenient to check the status of Timer recording.

Portrait view:

This is convenient to narrow down channels to search for the programme you want to watch.

To switch between Landscape view and Portrait view

Press [GUIDE].

Using the GUIDE Plus+ list

To change channels Landscape view
Press [▲, ▼] to select a channel. Portrait view Press [◀, ▶] to select a channel. The GUIDE Plus+ list appears for this channel.
To view a programme list for another day● Jump ahead 24 hours Press the “Green” button to jump ahead by one day. ● Jump back 24 hours Press the “Red” button. You can only jump back to the current date. Past information cannot be viewed.
To change the page of the GUIDE Plus+ listPress [ ∧ ∨ CH].
To see programme information (programme name, programme duration, broadcast time, description, etc.) (Programmes with the i symbol)Press [STATUS ] ◆ Press [▲] and [▼] to scroll up and down. To show other pages Press [CH ∧] (Previous) or [ ∨ CH] (Next). To return to the GUIDE Plus+ list Press [STATUS ]
To return to the previous screenPress [RETURN ▶].
To exit the screenPress [EXIT].

Notes

  • The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible via the aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ data via externally connected digital satellite receivers is not possible.
  • The GUIDE Plus+ system setup will not work if the clock is not set correctly or the wrong postcode is selected.

View advertisement

Enter your postcode when using this function for the first time (=> 76, Post Code) and leave the unit in standby overnight to capture the information.

If you have already entered your postcode in Owner ID (=> 14), you do not have to enter it again.

If you enter an incorrect postcode for your area, or no postcodes are entered, advertisements may not be displayed correctly.

To display advertisement information

1 Press [OPTION]. *

2 Press [▲, ▼] to select "Select Advert", then press [OK].

* While the advertisement information is not captured, "Enter Words" screen is displayed. (→ 35, Searching by entering words)

- To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the information.

- To update the information continuously, this unit must be left in standby mode overnight.

To change advertisements

Press [▲, ▼].

To return to TV Guide

Press [RETURN]

Notes

- Some advertisements are for future programmes and you can set the timer recording of the programmes using the advertisement screen. Follow the on-screen instructions.

- The information from the GUIDE Plus+ system will not be lost even if the unit is turned off at the mains outlet.

Tips

When the unit displays "No Data" or the empty GUIDE Plus+ list:

TV Guide: Landscape Sun 10/10/10 19:45 Sun 10th All Types All Channels 7 ITV 1 Time: 19.30 20.00 20.30 21.00 BBC 1 East... D.I.Y SOS Red Cap BBC 2 Hot Wars Holiday Programme ITV 1 Channel 4 Scraphear-Clam - Sheet Show Channel 5 24m The "empty" field

- Some digital broadcasts may not send programme information. Set the timer recording manually (⇒ 30, Manual timer recordings).

Series recording

HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW

You can record all the episodes of a series by setting just one timer recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system.

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

- The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.

2

▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the series

programme, then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 1

3

▲, ▼ to select "Series Timer

Rec.", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 3 - 1

- If the same episode has already been set for series timer recording at a different time or on another channel, "Series Timer Rec." will not be selectable.

Selection Screen Sun: 01/06/17 Holiday Progress 2.38C Sonic Sun: 01/07/0 26:59 - 22:33 View Single Timer Rec. Series Timer Rec. Delete Series info Track Recording HDD Releaving SP DVD LSE SP SUN: 12/07/13 (12:44:00) Channel Date Start Step HDD HDD SP Make STILL UP RENEY 2.38C 2.4 30:30 2.4 HDD SP OK…

4

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 4 - 1

  • You cannot change "Channel" and "Date". With "Start" and "Stop" automatically set by the "Guide Link" function, "Start" can be changed back by up to 10 minutes and "Stop" can be changed forward by up to 10 minutes.
  • This unit automatically records the programmes that are identified to be of the same series by the GUIDE Plus+ data.
  • Titles recorded using series recording are bundled and displayed as a "group" in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (⇒ 36) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.

20:30 21:00 21:30 SOS Red Cap S Holiday Programme Holi... Series recording icon

Tips

To check the schedule of the series

Press the "Blue" button after performing steps ① - ② (⇒ above).

Series Information Sun 10/10/10 10:30 Name Date Contents BBC2 10:10 Sun Decemeron 1 BBC2 25:06 Tue Decemeron 2 BBC2 01:08 Tue Decemeron 3 BBC2 09:05 Tue Decemeron 4 BBC2 15:08 Tue Decemeron 1 R

s: The episode to be recorded R: Repeat programme

Notes

  • "Series Timer Rec" will only be available when broadcaster is sending series link information.
  • If the unit cannot record the first run, the unit will record the repeat programme if it is available. However, this unit will not record the repeat programme, if any part of the first run is recorded.
  • The series recording will be cancelled if there has been no episode of the series for 13 weeks.

Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or category

This function lets you display a GUIDE Plus+ list sorted by programme type (e.g. Movie, Sport) or category (e.g. Free Channels, Radio).

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

- The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.

2a

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2a - 1

(Yellow) to display the list of programme type.

Type Category

All Types All Types Movie News Entertainment Sport Children's Education Lifestyle Drama Al Channels All Channels Free Channels Radio Data Favourite 1 Favourite 2 Favourite 3 Favourite 4

2b

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2b - 1

(Blue)

to display the categories.

3

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 3 - 1

to select the desired item.

4

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 4 - 1

– A list appears with all programmes of the selected item. - When you select the landscape view, the programmes that belong to the selected programme type are highlighted.

TV Game: Landscape Sun 10/10/12 19:45 Sun Time 7. FIV 1 10:30-12:30 Time BBC 1 BBC 2 FIV 1 Channel 4 Channel 5 FIV 2 280 hours 6. Info Explore Change Display Mode News Console Show Page Chart Show Page Print Show Page Info Play Type Category SELECT Options: Select Advert, etc. Page + RETURN Info: Gu…

e.g.,

Programme type, "News" is selected in step

③ of Landscape view.

5

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 5 - 1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 5 - 2

to select the

programme.

After searching, see Tips in “Searching using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD”.

Notes

  • The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas. This function does not work properly unless the information which distinguishes the programme type and categories sent from broadcast stations is correct.
  • The programme list is available immediately if this unit has found a digital station and loaded the information in the memory. This process can take a while depending on the particular station.
  • The programme list data are continuously downloaded in the background when the unit is turned on. That means that the programme list can sometimes change while you are looking at it.

Tips

To return to the previous GUIDE Plus+ list before you have selected the programme type or categories

Select "All Types" of the programme type and "All Channels" of the categories in step 3. (→ above)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Searching for the programme from the GUIDE Plus+ list

Searching by entering words

By entering words, you can search for programmes from the GUIDE Plus+ list using the programme information.

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

- The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.

2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 2

3

▲, ▼ to select "Free Word

Search", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 3 - 1

4

Enter the word you would like to

search for, then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 4 - 1

Entry method →

46, Entering Text

5

▲, ▼ to select "Simplified Search"

or "Detailed Search", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 5 - 1

Simplified Search:

It searches the

programme names only.

Detailed Search:

It searches all the

information on the

programmes. It might take more time to search the desired programme.

Free Word Search Simplified Search Detailed Search Detailed Search may result in many hits, but search time will be longer.

Sun 10/10/10 19:45 TV Guide: Bonnait Sun 10th Search results for "Dog" 11 SKY THREE SKYTHREE Premier R Virgin Radi Clyde 1 Thu 20th 19:30:20:30 The Dog Whisp... 22:00:42:30 The Dog Whisp... Fri 21st 19:30:40:50 The Dog Whisp...

Search results appear.

6

▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the

programme.

After searching, see "Searching using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD" for tips.

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN]

It may return to the GUIDE Plus+ screen.

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Searching using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD

HDD

You can search for programmes using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD. Also, if you select "Series Timer Rec", you can easily search for the programme series and set series timer recordings.

Preparation:

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1

During play or while stopped

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles HDD 10/10 11/10 2 Top: Mechanical Show Previous Page 02/02 Next OPTION Select Info Previous Next

When "VIDEO" is not selected, press the "Red" button to select "VIDEO".

2

▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select a title, then

OPTION

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 2 - 1

3

▲, ▼ to select "TV Guide

Explorer", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 3 - 1

4

▲, ▼ to select "Series

Timer Rec" or "Find

Titles", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 4 - 1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 4 - 2

5

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 5 - 1

- When searching using a word other than the title name, enter a different word. (→ 46, Entering Text)

6

▲, ▼ to select "Simplified Search"

or "Detailed Search", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 6 - 1

- Refer to step 5 ( ⇒ left) for more information about "Simplified Search" and "Detailed Search".

7

▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the

programme.

After searching, see Tips below.

Notes

  • Searching by "Series Timer Rec" only works with titles recorded via GUIDE Plus+.
  • If you press [RETURN], the unit may return to the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.

Tips

After searching

① Press [OK].

② If the "Timer Recording" screen appears

Go to step ③ of "Timer Recording" (⇒ 22)

If the "Selection Screen" appears

Press [▲, ▼] to select the item.

● "View" ⇒ 19, Watching Television - "Single Timer Rec." ⇒ 22, Timer Recording, step 3 - "Series Timer Rec." → 34, Series recording, step 4 - "Delete" ⇒ Timer recordings can be cancelled.

Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes" and press [OK].

- The timer icon disappears.

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Selecting Titles to Play

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

You can easily select and play recorded programmes by using DIRECT NAVIGATOR.

1PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR) - 1

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles HDD VIDEO @ 7:13:5E 100 100 ... BDC 1 10/10 FEE BDC 1 10/10 SAT ... ... Previous Page 02/02 Next OPTION Select Previous Next

HDD RAM

When "VIDEO" is not selected, press the "Red" button to select "VIDEO".

2

Use ▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the title you want to watch, then press OK.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM - 1

Tips

To select the title with the numbered buttons

e.g., HDD

5: [0] → [0] → [5]

15: [0] → [1] → [5]

115: [1] → [1] → [5]

e.g.,

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

5: [0] => [5]

15: [1] <=> [5]

HDD To display the "Properties" screen

Press [STATUS] when a title with "Info" on the bottom of the All Titles or Grouped Titles screen is selected. (→ 47)

To view other pages

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK]. – You can also press [|◀◀, ▶▶▶] to view other pages.

To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons - 1

Protected.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons - 2

Not recorded due to recording protection (Digital broadcasts, etc.)

✗ It cannot be played because data is damaged, etc.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons - 3

Currently recording.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons - 4

Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD (→ 32, Relief Recording)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons - 5

"One time only recording" restriction (→ 92, CPRM)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons - 6

Groups of titles (HDD only)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons - 7

Title that was recorded but has not yet been played (HDD only)

(NTSC)

Title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV System currently selected on the unit.

- Alter the "TV System" setting on this unit to suit (→ 74).

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance

"Grouped Titles"/"All Titles" HDD

"Table Display"/"Thumbnail Display"

① While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, press [OPTION].

② Press [▲, ▼] to select the item, then press [OK]. e.g.,

Table Display All Titles PICTURE / MUSIC "Table Display" or "Thumbnail Display" "Grouped Titles" or "All Titles" HDD

Grouped Titles screen

Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly or series timer recording mode are bundled and displayed as one item. (in Thumbnail Display)

All Titles screen

Displays all titles. (in Thumbnail Display)

DIRECT NAVIGATOR HDD Grouped Titles VIDEO PRICE M-3C 10:10 Channel Show 10:10 Dopfino Previous Page 02/02 Next OPTION Select Info Previous Next

DIRECT NAVIGATOR HDD All Titles VIDEO Picture N.BC E01 E03 E06 BBC 10/10 FRI BBC 11/10 SAT BBC 18/10 SAT China Snow Doping Doping Previous Page 02/02 Next OPTION Select Info Previous Next

Select the item marked with (and press [OK] to display the bundled titles.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - All Titles screen - 3

To sort the titles for easy searching

HDD (All Titles screen in Table Display only)

This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback from many titles.

① Press [OPTION].

② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Sort", then press [OK].

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select the item, then press [OK]. If you select an item other than "No."

- The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after playback of the selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)

- Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being played back.

- If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or switch to another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be cancelled.

To play grouped titles HDD

① Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the group, then press [OK].

② Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the title, then press [OK].

To edit the group of titles HDD

HDD (Grouped Titles screen only)

① Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select a title or a group, then press [■■].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary titles.

- Press [11] to cancel.

② Press [OPTION].

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select the item, then press [OK].

Create Group:

Press [◀, ▶] to select "Create", then press [OK]. Selected titles are bundled to form a group.

Release Grouping

Press [◀, ▶] to select "Release", then press [OK].

- When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group are released.

- When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from the group.

Regarding the group name

The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.

graph LR A["HDID"] --> B["Grouped Titles"] B --> C["VIDEO"] C --> D["VIDEO"] D --> E["Previous"] E --> F["Page 02/02"] F --> G["Next"] G --> H["Back"] I["HDID"] --> J["Grouped Titles"] J --> K["VIDEO"] K --> L["VIDEO"] L --> M["Previous"] M --> N["Page 01/01"] N --> O["Next"] O --> P["Back"] Q["HDID…

To change the group name

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the group and press [OPTION].

2 Press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit" and press [OK]. 3 Press [▲, ▼] to select "Enter Name" and press [OK]. 4 Enter the name. (⇒ 46, Entering Text) - Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.

Notes

This function is only available for Videos and not available for music or still pictures.

During playback ◀◀ or ▶▶

  • There are 5 search speeds. Each press increases the search speed. (+R +R DL +RW up to 3 speeds)
  • Press [▶] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.

Tips

Depending on the disc, search may not be possible.

Skip

You can skip to the beginning (or the end) of Title/ Chapter. Skip is operated for each chapter.

During playback or while paused

– Each press increases the number of skips.

Quick View (Play × 1.3)

Allows you to increase the play speed slightly without distorting the audio.

During playback

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Quick View (Play × 1.3) - 1

(Press

- Press again to return to normal speed.

Direct Play

During playback, you can access specific titles or scenes through direct entry of the numbered buttons.

1 2 3 4 5° 6 7 8 9 DELETE 0 INPUT SELECT e.g., 5: [0] ⇒ [0] ⇒ [5] 15: [0] ⇒ [1] ⇒ [5] •MP3 e.g., 5: [0] ⇒ [0] ⇒ [0] ⇒ [5] 15: [0] ⇒ [0] ⇒ [1] ⇒ [5] •Other discs Input a 2-digit number e.g., 5: [0] ⇒ [5] 15: [1] ⇒ [5]

Slow-motion Play

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR) VCD

While paused or

  • There are 5 slow-motion speeds. Each press increases the speed.
  • Press [▶] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.

Notes

  • If continued for approx. 5 minutes, slow-motion play pauses automatically (except DVD-V VCD). • VCD allow slow-motion in the forward direction only.

Frame-by-Frame Viewing

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR) VCD

While paused

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Frame-by-Frame Viewing - 1

– Each press shows the next or previous frame. - Press and hold to advance or reverse frame-by-frame in succession. - Press [▶] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.

Notes

• VCD allow Frame-by-Frame in the forward direction only.

Time Slip

HDD RAM

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL (This function does not work with finalised discs.)

+RW -RW(VR)

Use to skip in 1-minute or 10-minute increments.

1

During playback

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Time Slip - 1

and

② ▲, ▼ to select the time, then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Time Slip - 2

  • Each time you press [▲, ▼], the time increases [▲] or decreases [▼] by 1-minute intervals.
  • Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.

Manual Skip

HDD RAM

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL (This function does not work with finalised discs.)

+RW -RW(VR)

1-minute skip function: Skips approx. 1 minute forward with each press.

During playback

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Manual Skip - 1

10-second skip back function: Each time you press, play skips backward approximately 10 seconds.

During playback

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Manual Skip - 2

Create Chapters

HDD RAM

After creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you can easily reach the head of scene using [I◄◄, ►►] (SKIP) or play on Chapter View. (⇔ 49)

During playback

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Create Chapters - 1

Tips

- Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby ( ⇒ 28).

Showing the menu screen

① Insert the disc. ② If the menu screen appears, press [▲, ▼] to select the item and press [OK]. e.g., CD

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Showing the menu screen - 1

USB

① Insert the USB memory. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select a file type and press [OK]. e.g.

USB device Video (MPEG2) Picture (JPEG) Music (MP3)

③ If the menu screen appears, press [▲, ▼] to select the item and press [OK].

USB device View Pictures (JPEG) Start Slideshow Copy New Pictures (JPEG) Copy All Pictures (JPEG) Copy Selected Pictures (JPEG)

Showing the menu with FUNCTION MENU Display e.g. selecting a file to play

① Press [RETURN] several times to exit the menu. ② Press [FUNCTION MENU].

DIGA FUNCTION MENU CD Playback Recording Copy TV Guide Others Drive Select Picture Music

1 Press [▲, ▼] to select "Playback", then press [OK]. 2 Press [▲, ▼] to select the file type, then press [OK].

USB

1 Press [▲, ▼] to select "Drive Select", then press [OK]. 2 Press [▲, ▼] to select "USB", then press [OK]. 3 Press [▲, ▼] to select the file type, then press [OK]. 4 Press [▲, ▼] to select "View Pictures (JPEG)" or "Play Music (MP3)" then press [OK].

Playing music files

You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory. (⇒ 17)

- You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording or copying.

1 Show MP3 Menu screen. (⇒ left Showing the menu screen)

Selected group MP3 Menu CD G 1 T 1 TOTAL 1/111 Number 0 - 9 No. Group 1 : My favorite Total Track 1 001 Both Ends Freezing 2 002 Lady Starfish 3 003 Life on Jupiter 4 004 Metal Glue 5 005 Paint It Yellow 6 006 Plyemomama

:Group No. B: Track No. in the group ©: Track No./Total tracks in all groups

② ▲, ▼ to select a track, then to play.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - ② ▲, ▼ to select a track, then to play. - 1

Tips

- " " indicates the track currently playing.

To stop playing

Press [■].

To exit the menu screens

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To view other pages

Press [◀◀, ▶▶].

To select the track with the numbered buttons

e.g., 5: [0] ⇒ [0] ⇒ [0] ⇒ [5]

15: [0] ⇒ [0] ⇒ [1] ⇒ [5]

Notes

- If the Power off link function (⇔ 43) is activated, this unit will automatically be set to standby mode and the music will stop as you set the TV to standby mode.

Using the Tree Screen to Find a Group

1 From the track list

▶ while a track is highlighted to display the tree screen.

MP3 Menu CD G B T 14 TOTAL 40/111 Number 0 - 9 Tree MP3 music G 7/25 001 My favorite *001 Brazilian pops *002 Chinese pops *003 Czech pops *004 Hungarian pops *005 Latin notes *006 Japanese pops *007 Mexican pops *008 Philippine pops

A: Selected Group No./Total Group No. If the group has no compatible track, “--” is displayed as the group number. B: You cannot select a group that contains no compatible track.

② ▲, ▼ to select a group, then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - ② ▲, ▼ to select a group, then - 1

- The track list for the selected group appears.

Tips

To return to the track list

Press [RETURN \$]

Playing still pictures

HDD RAM

-R | -R DL CD USB

- For more information about still picture files that can be played on this unit (⇒ 17)

① Show Album View screen.

-R -R DL CD USB

(⇒ 38, Showing the menu screen)

HDD RAM

While stopped

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.

2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When "PICTURE" is not selected, press the "Green" button to select "PICTURE".

Album View screen Regarding Album View screen ⇒ right Sample pictures ⇒ right

② Use ▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the album,

then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - ② Use ▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the album, - 1

e.g., HDD

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View HDD Previous Page 001/001 Next OPTION Slideshow

③ Use ▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the still

picture, then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - ③ Use ▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the still - 1

Tips

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons - 1

Picture and folder protected

Album that has not yet been viewed (HDD RAM)

To stop viewing a picture

Press [■].

To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View screen

Press [RETURN]

To exit the menu screens

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To view other pages

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK].

You can also press [◀◀, ▶▶] to view other pages.

To select the still picture or album with the numbered buttons

Album

e.g., 5: [0] ⇔ [0] ⇒ [5]

15: [0] ⇒ [1] ⇒ [5]

115: [1] ⇒ [1] ⇒ [5]

Still picture

e.g., 5: [0] ⇒ [0] ⇒ [0] ⇒ [5]

15: [0] ⇒ [0] ⇒ [1] ⇒ [5]

115: [0] ⇒ [1] ⇒ [1] ⇒ [5]

1115: [1] ⇒ [1] ⇒ [1] ⇒ [5]

Regarding Album View screen

Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

You can arrange these still pictures and create an album ( ⇒ 52).

HDD RAM

Grouped by date

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM - 1

Number of pictures/Shooting date

HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB

Album

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB - 1

Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name

- Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC, etc., the information about the recording date may not be displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--/--/--].

Notes

●Still pictures cannot be played during recording or copying.

Sample Pictures

- Sample JPEG pictures are pre-installed on the HDD of this unit. You can play them back or start a slideshow (→ below) with them.

If you want to delete sample pictures, perform "Cancel Protection" and then delete them. (→ 48)

Start Slideshow

HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB

You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval with favourite music.

1 While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen is displayed

▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the album.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB - 1

Tips

You can also start Slideshow by pressing [OPTION] and press [▲, ▼] to select "Start Slideshow" and then press [OK].

To select multiple albums for starting Slideshow:

① Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the album.

② Press [11].

A check mark appears.

- Press [11] again to cancel the selection.

③ Repeat steps ①-② until you select all necessary albums.

④ Perform step ②

To select all albums for starting Slideshow:

① Press [■] in step ①

② Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

③ Perform step ②.

USB

To start Slideshow on the menu screen:

① Insert the USB memory.

The menu is automatically displayed. (→ 38)

② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Start Slideshow", then press [OK].

Notes

Sample Music is selected for default Background Music, which is played with Slideshow. Refer to "Slideshow Settings" to turn off or change the Background Music. (→ 40)

Slideshow Settings

1 While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen is displayed (⇒ 39)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Slideshow Settings - 1

② ▲, ▼ to select "Slideshow Settings", then

③ ▲, ▼ to select "Picture Settings" or "Background Music Settings", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Slideshow Settings - 2

③ Use ▲, ▼ to select "Picture Settings" or "Background Music Settings", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Slideshow Settings - 3

4 Use ▲, ▼ to select the item, then ◀, ▶ to select the setting (see below).

▲, ▼, ◀, ► to select "Set", then

Picture Settings

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Slideshow Settings - 4

Display Interval: Select the desired interval. ("Normal", "Long" or "Short")

Picture Settings Please set the following functions. Display Interval Normal Repeat Play On Random Off Set Cancel

Display Interval: Select the desired interval. ("Normal", "Long" or "Short")

- The display interval may vary depending on the picture data size.

Random: Select "On" to play pictures in the selected album at random.

Random: Select "On" to play pictures in the selected album at random.

Background Music Settings

Background Music Settings Please set the following functions. Background Music On Random Off Music Selection Sample Music Set Cancel

Background Music: Select "On" to play Slideshow with Background Music.

Select "Off" to play Slideshow without Background Music.

Random: Select "On" to play Background Music at random.

Music Selection:

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Music Selection" and press [OK].

② Press [▲, ▼] to select the storage location of Background Music and press [OK].

- "Sample Music" is Background Music pre-installed on HDD.

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select an album for Background Music and press [OK] when selecting other than "Sample Music".

Notes

- Music albums on HDD, a disc and a USB memory can be used as the Slideshow Background Music. However, when selecting still images on a disc or a USB memory for the slideshow, music albums on the same media cannot be used as the Background Music. (Even if a music album on the same media is selected, the music is not played.)

- "Sample Music" cannot be deleted or changed to other files.

- "Music Selection" setting turns back to "Sample Music" when removing media on which specified Background Music is recorded or deleting specified Background Music files.

- DTS-CD cannot be played back as Slideshow Background Music.

Rotate Pictures

1 While playing a picture OPTION

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Rotate Pictures - 1

② Press ▲, ▼ to select "Rotate RIGHT" or "Rotate LEFT", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Rotate Pictures - 2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Rotate Pictures - 3

Tips

To return the picture to its original position

Press [▲, ▼] to select the opposite rotation in step ②, then press [OK].

Notes

- Rotation information will not be stored.

-R -R DL CD USB Still pictures

- When disc or album is protected

– When played on other equipment

- When copying pictures

- When changing date

- "Rotate RIGHT" and "Rotate LEFT" do not work during Slideshow.

Zoom

1 While playing a picture

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Zoom - 1

To zoom in:

Press ▲, ▼ to select "Zoom in", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Zoom - 2

Tips

To return the picture to its original size

Press [▲, ▼] to select "Zoom out" in step ②, then press [OK].

Notes

  • When zooming in, the still picture may be cut off.
  • "Zoom in" information is not stored.
  • "Zoom in" and "Zoom out" do not work with images that have a resolution larger than 640 × 480 pixels.
  • "Zoom in" and "Zoom out" do not work during Slideshow.

Picture Properties

Picture information is shown (e.g., shooting date).

While playing a picture

STATUS

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - While playing a picture - 1

twice to display picture properties.

18:53:50 11/10

Date 1/1/2010 No.

3/9

Shooting Date

- Depending on the camera or editing software, shooting dates may not be displayed correctly.

Or

1 From the Picture (JPEG) View screen, use ▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select the picture, then

2 Use ▲, ▼ to select "Properties", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Or - 1

Information (e.g., image size and file size) is shown.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Or - 2

Information (e.g., image size and file size) is shown.

To play music CD

Preparation:

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

1 Insert a music CD.

1 Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

CD Play Music Copy Music SELECT OK RETURN

② Use ▲, ▼ to select "Play Music", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - ② Use ▲, ▼ to select "Play Music", then - 1

– The music CD starts playing back.

- You can also select the track with the numbered buttons. e.g., 5: [0] ⇒ [5], 15: [1] ⇒ [5]

To play music recorded on HDD

Copying music to HDD ⇒ 64

Preparation:

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - 1 - 1

When "MUSIC" is not selected, press the "Yellow" button to select "MUSIC".

② Use ▲, ▼ to select the album, then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - ② Use ▲, ▼ to select the album, then - 1

- You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.

e.g.,

5: [0] ⇒ [0] ⇒ [5]

15: [0] ⇒ [1] ⇒ [5]

③ ▲, ▼ to select the track, then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - ③ ▲, ▼ to select the track, then - 1

- You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g.

5: [0] → [0] → [0] → [5]

15: [0] → [0] → [1] → [5]

  1. [6] → [6] → [1] → [8] 115: [0] → [1] → [1] → [5]
  2. [6] → [1] → [1] → [3] 1115: [1] → [1] → [1] → [5]
  3. [1] → [1] → [1] → [3]

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN $]

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Notes

  • You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.
  • When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed if "Screen Saver" is set to "On" in the Setup menu (⇒ 74). To return to the previous screen, press [OK].

Useful functions during music play

Operations during play

StopPress [■].The stopped position is memorized.Press [▶] (PLAY) to restart from this position.• If [■] is pressed several times, the position is cleared.
PausePress [■■].Press [■■] again or [▶] (PLAY) to restart play.
SearchPress [◀◀] or [▶▶].The speed increases up to 5 steps.Press [▶] (PLAY) to restart play.
SkipDuring play or while paused, press [◀◀]or [▶▶■].Skip to the track you want to play.Each press increases the number of skips.
Repeat Play HDDYou can select the item which you want to repeat.While playing1Press [OPTION].2Press [▲,▼] to select “Repeat Play Setting”, then press [OK].3Press [▲,▼] to select the item, then press [OK].● Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.
Sort HDDYou can change the order of the Album View alphabetically.While Album View screen is displayed1Press [OPTION].2Press [▲,▼] to select “Sort”, then press [OK].3Press [▲,▼] to select “Album Name”, then press [OK].To cancel the sorted screenPress [▲,▼] to select “No.”, then press [OK].
Properties HDDWhile Track View screen is displayed1Press [OPTION].2Press [▲,▼] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU Display

By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main functions quickly and easily.

- If "FUNCTION MENU Display" is set to "On" in the Setup menu, FUNCTION MENU automatically appears when you turn the power on. (⇒ 74)

1 With the unit stoppedPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - FUNCTION MENU Display - 1

② ▲, ▼ to select a function, then ③ ▲, ▼ to select an item, thenPANASONIC DMR-EX86 - FUNCTION MENU Display - 2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - FUNCTION MENU Display - 3

Select a function and an item. You can access selected function easily. DELETE Navigator Grouped Ttl HDD Previous Page 00/02 Next OPTION Select Info Previous Next

Playback

Select when you wish to playback the contents. The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen or menu screen etc. will be displayed.

• Video (⇒ 20, 36)

- Picture (⇒ 39)

- Music (⇒ 38, 41)

- Top Menu (⇒ 20)

- Menu (⇒ 20)

Recording

Select when you wish to perform manual timer recording, or check the timer recording. The timer recording list will be displayed. (⇒ 30, 31)

Delete

Select the title or file type you wish to delete. The DELETE Navigator screen will be displayed.

Select the copy method.

• Video (HDD to DVD) (⇒ 59)

- Advanced Copy (⇒ 60) - Copy Music (⇒ 64)

TV Guide

Select when you wish to watch or record a programme. The TV Guide will be displayed. (⇒ 19, 22)

Others

Select and execute a function other than those above, such as recording or setting.

  • Playlists (⇒ 50, 55)
  • Flexible Rec (→ 27)
  • HDD Management (→ 68) • DVD Management (→ 68)
  • Setup (→ 70)

Drive Select

Change which drive is used.

- HDD - DVD - USB

Tips

To exit the FUNCTION MENU

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

To pause the TV programme you are watching — Pause Live TV

You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit's tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.

If you stop the Pause Live TV function, the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

① Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit the connections to this unit. ② Turn on this unit and press [∧ ∨ CH] to select the channel. ③ When you want to pause the TV programme, press [PAUSE LIVE TV].

This icon indicates that the Pause Live TV is working.

Illustration of a dolphin leaping over water with sky and clouds, no text or symbols present

④ When you want to resume playback, press [▶] (PLAY).

  • The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode (→ 25) regardless of the recording mode and the drive selected before starting saving.
  • At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)

Operations during Pause Live TV

SearchPress [◀◀, ▶▶].
PausePress [■■].• Press [▶] (PLAY) to restart.
Quick ViewPress and hold [▶] (PLAY/×1.3).• Press again to return to the normal speed.
Slow-motionWhile paused, press [◀◀] or [▶▶].The speed increases up to 5 steps.• Press [▶] (PLAY) to restart play.
Stop PauseLive TV1 Press [■].2 Press [◀, ▶] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Notes

  • The Pause Live TV function does not work for Digital Teletext. (→ 45)
  • The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer recording starts. ●The Pause Live TV function does not work

- when the clock is not set

  • while recording
  • while timer recording – while EXT LINK recording, etc.
  • You cannot change audio or subtitle during resume play.
  • The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is full or the saving lasts 8 hours. ●The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after started.
  • "DVB Multi Audio" of on-screen menu cannot be switched during Pause Live TV.

You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using "VIERA Link" or Q Link.

VIERA Link "HDAVI Control" is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or receiver under "HDAVI Control". You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating instructions for connected equipment for operational details.

  • VIERA Link "HDAVI Control", based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers' equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
  • This unit supports "HDAVI Control 5" function. "HDAVI Control 5" is the standard for Panasonic's HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic's conventional HDAVI equipment.
  • Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers' equipment supporting VIERA Link function.

Preparation:

1 Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (=> 12), or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (=> 79). 2 Set "VIERA Link" to "On" (=> 75). (The default setting is "On".) 3 Set the "HDAVI Control" operations on the connected equipment (e.g., TV). - Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be used as "HDAVI Control". 4 Turn on all "HDAVI Control" compatible equipment and select this unit's input channel on the connected TV so that the "HDAVI Control" function works properly. Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.

Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.

Preparation:

- Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable (=> 10, 11).

Notes

The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function to Q Link from Panasonic.

For details, refer to your television's operating instructions or consult your dealer.

•Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic) ●DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz) ●Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips) ●Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig) ●SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)

Notes

  • These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
  • About "HDAVI Control" function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.

(When the TV is on) Easy playback

VIERA Link Q Link

When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV's input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode (VIERA Link) or AV input mode (Q Link) and the TV displays the corresponding action. (Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]*1, [▶] (PLAY), [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.

VIERA Link Q Link

When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action. (Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]*1, [▶] (PLAY), [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.

• DVD-V, CD, VCD, SVCD, and MP3

The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.

When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU etc. is displayed, during playback or when the unit is set to a timer recording.

Even if the TV is turned off, the unit will not be turned off at the same time when recording, copying, finalising etc.

- When this unit is connected to an "HDAVI Control" compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn off.

This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.

- Depending on the TV type connected with this unit, this function may not work.

Press and hold [● DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.

Recording starts

To stop recording

Press [■]

●The titles are recorded to the HDD. - If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV Recording, the Direct TV Recording may stop. - When "EXT-L" lights on the unit's display (⇒ 28), Direct TV Recording is unavailable.

*1 This button is available only when this unit is on. *2 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents from where playback started. In this case, press [◀◀] or [◀◀] to go back to where playback started. *3 This function is available with the TV that supports "HDAVI Control 3" or later.

Easy control only with VIERA remote control

If you connect this unit to the TV that supports "HDAVI Control 2" or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.

You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.

The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV. Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.

  • The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.
  • The TV displays the TV tuner's picture when the linked operation is finished.

This function is available with the TV that supports "HDAVI Control 2" or later.

① Display this unit's "FUNCTION MENU" using the TV remote control.

  • If this unit is turned off, this unit will turn on automatically.
  • About the FUNCTION MENU Display (→ 42, 74)

② Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote control, then press [OK].

This function is available with the TV that supports "HDAVI Control 2" or later.

By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the "Control Panel" (⇒ below) and display the Top Menu for DVD-Video.

① Display this unit's "FUNCTION MENU" using the TV remote control. (⇒ left)

② Press [OPTION].

- You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu for DVD-Video is displayed or while DVD-Video is being copied.

③ Select an item, then press [OK].

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit VIERA Link - 1

Switch to TV Displayed when watching with the tuner of this unit. It will return to the TV picture.
Control Panel Control Panel is displayed.(⇒ below)
FUNCTION MENU FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
Top Menu DVD-VTop Menu is displayed. (⇒ 20)
Menu DVD-VMenu is displayed. (⇒ 20)
Standby Settings “Standby Settings” screen is displayed (⇒ 76).
Drive Select Select the HDD, DVD drive.
Slideshow “Album View” screen is displayed(⇒ 39).
Rotate RIGHT/Rotate LEFT (JPEG)Rotate the still pictures. (⇒ 40)
Zoom in/Zoom out (JPEG)Enlarge or shrink the still picture.(⇒ 40)
Audio DescriptionAudio Description screen is displayed. (⇒ 45)

Using the Control Panel

Using the "Control Panel", you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc. with the TV remote control. Select "Control Panel", then press [OK] in step③ (⇒ above).

The Control Panel is displayed (⇒ right)

• While playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.

  • [ ▲]: Pause, [▼]: Stop, [◀]: Search backward, [▶]: Search forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel

• While playing still pictures

- [▼]: Stop, [◀]: View previous picture,

[▶]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel

■ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode

Press [⏻] on this unit's remote control, then set to standby mode.

■ When not using "HDAVI Control"

Set "VIERA Link" in the Setup menu to "Off" (⇒ 75).

Control Panel Pause Search Play Stop Exit Search

Digital Channel Information

You can display the information about programmes (programme name, broadcast time, etc.).

With the unit stopped

STATUS

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Digital Channel Information - 1

to show the screen information.

When the digital channel information is being displayed – Press [STATUS] again and detailed information will be displayed (only when "info" is displayed).

Status message ( ⇒ 46)

HDD 1:07 SP 1 DVD BBC ONE Wales "info i" 1 BBC ONE Wales 12-11 All Channels Wires today Change Category 17:00 - 17:15 NOW! Mark Audio TXT Subtile STATUS i STATUS Digital channel information 1 BBC ONE Wales 12-11 All Channels Wires today 17:00 - 17:15 NOW! Exit Info ① In the 1876s, John Bockl, workin…

Channel and Station Name Signal Quality (→ 46) 1 BBC ONE Wales No Signal 19:03 All Channels BBC News 19:00 - 19:30 ← NOW ▶ Change Category □ info i Encrypted AD Multi Audio TXT Subtitle

Encrypted

Multi Audio

TXT

Subtitle

Even with programmes with "AD", "Multi Audio", "TXT" and "Subtitle" indications, you may not be able to use these services. To confirm the availability of these services, refer to the indications in the detailed information too.

e.g.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Subtitle - 1

These indications are not displayed properly unless the information sent from broadcast stations is correct.

Tips

To switch information of the current programme and the next programme

Press [◀, ▶].

  • NOW: current programme ●NEXT: next programme

To select the information of another channel

Press [▲, ▼].

- Press [OK] to watch the selected channel.

To change the length of time digital channel information is displayed for

(→ 74, On-Screen Messages)

Notes

  • Every time you change the channel, digital channel information appears automatically. They disappear again after a short time.
  • If you record a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that is not being received correctly, digital channel information is also recorded and will remain visible during playback.

Listening to the Audio Description

This function can aid visually-impaired viewers by adding an audio track to describe events on-screen.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Listening to the Audio Description - 1

When "AD" appears in digital channel information

OPTION

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Listening to the Audio Description - 2

to show the OPTION menu.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Listening to the Audio Description - 3

▲, ▼ to select "Audio Description",

then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Listening to the Audio Description - 4

– Audio Description screen appears.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Listening to the Audio Description - 5

▲, ▼ to select "Audio Description".

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Listening to the Audio Description - 6

◀, ▶ to select "Auto", then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Listening to the Audio Description - 7

Notes

- Programmes are recorded with Audio Description when you record them with "Audio Description" set to "Auto".

Tips

•To turn off the Audio Description

In the step ④ (→ above), press [◀, ▶] to select "Off", then press [RETURN ≈].

•To change the volume

In the step 3 (→ above press [▲, ▼] to select "Volume" and press [◀, ▶] to set the volume, then press [RETURN ↩].

- You can switch the Audio Description and change its volume during recording and timer recording.

Showing the Digital Teletext

When "TXT" appears in digital channel information

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Showing the Digital Teletext - 1

to show the Digital Teletext.

- Press again to hide.

Notes

  • During recording the Digital Teletext function is not possible.
  • When subtitle is on or the digital channel information is displayed, the Digital Teletext function does not work.

Tips

To view another page of Digital Teletext

Press [▲, ▼] to select another page, then press [OK].

- You can also use the numbered buttons to select another page.

Quickly access to certain topic areas and navigation

Use colour buttons according to on-screen instructions.

Showing Subtitles

When "Subtitle" appears in digital channel information

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Showing Subtitles - 1

to show subtitles.

- Press again to hide.

Notes

  • Programmes are recorded with subtitles when you record them with the subtitles setting set to "Subtitles On".
  • You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.

Tips

To select subtitle language (see 71, DVB Preferred Subtitles)

Changing the Category

You can select one of your favourite channels by changing the category [such as Free Channels, Radio and Registered Favourites (see 70)].

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Changing the Category - 1

to change the category.

Information Messages

Signal Quality

No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not being received.

No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.

Notes

- If "No Signal" is displayed, check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly broadcasting.

Status Messages

The following messages and displays appear to let you know what operations are being performed and the status of the unit.

During playback and/or recording

STATUS

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Status Messages - 1

Several times to cycle through available displays.

graph TD A["Current media"] --> B["HDD"] A --> C["REC"] A --> D["1 DVB BBC ONE Wales"] A --> E["DVD REC"] B --> F["Shows current recording or play status."] C --> G["Channel information"] D --> H["Recording drive/Copy progress indicator"] E --> I["Remaining recording time and recording mode (e.g.: &…

- When using Pause Live TV

The time when the picture currently displayed was broadcasted

Play 15:05:13 Live 15:10:46 Current time No Display

New Channel Message

When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be informed automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you select "Yes" on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings and Favourites are deleted and the timer recording programmes are also cancelled.). However recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.

New Channel A new DVB Channel has been found. Start DVB Auto Setup? Selecting DVB Auto Setup will delete all Timer Programmes. Yes No

Tips

The display/hide setting can be changed ( ⇒ 74).

Entering Text

You can give names to recorded titles, etc.

Also, you can search for desired programmes on GUIDE Plus+ list by entering key words or the programme name. (Free Word Search, Find Titles) ( ⇒ 35)

1 When viewing the "Enter Title Name" screen etc.

Enter Title Name Top Menu Preview Delete Add to List Name List Set Space

e.g., "Enter Title Name" screen

▲, ▼, ◀, ▶ to select a

character, then

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Entering Text - 2

- Repeat this step to enter other characters.

Using the numbered buttons to enter characters e.g.: entering the letter "R"

1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.

2 Press [7] twice to highlight "R".

3 Press [OK]

To enter a space

Press [DELETE *], then press [OK].

To delete a character

Press [11] on a character in the name field.

To cancel in the middle

Press [RETURN]

- Characters will not be saved.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Entering Text - 3

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Entering Text - 4

when you've finished entering text.

Tips

■ To add a name to the list

You can add frequently used names and recall them later.

Maximum number of added names: 20

Maximum number of characters per name: 44

After entering the name (step 1)

  1. Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Add to List", then press [OK].

- You can also press [▶▶] to select "Add to List".

  1. Press [◀, ▶] to select "Add", then press [OK].

- Press [RETURN] to cancel.

■ To recall an added name

  1. Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Name List", then press [OK].

- You can also press [◀◀] to select "Name List".

  1. Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the name to be recalled, then press [OK].

■ To delete an added name

  1. Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Name List", then press [OK].

- You can also press [◀◀] to select "Name List".

  1. Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the name to be deleted.
  2. Press [OPTION] to show "Delete Name", then press [OK].
  3. Press [◀, ▶] to select "Delete", then press [OK].
  4. Press [RETURN]

Notes

●The number of characters that can be entered depends on what kind of things you name. - If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu after finalisation ( ⇒ 69). When entering a title name, the name that will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in "Top Menu Preview" window.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 1

HDD RAM

-R | -R DL | -RW(V) +R +R DL (You can not edit finalised discs.)

+RW -RW(VR)

You can edit titles on the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen: deleting unwanted parts of titles such as commercials, changing Thumbnail, dividing and deleting titles, etc.

Tips

• Maximum numbers of titles on a disc

HDD

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)

+R +R DL +RW

499 99 49

Accessing the Title View

Preparation:

- RAM Release protection (→ 68, Setting Protection).

① Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive. ② Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. HDD RAM When "VIDEO" is not selected, press the "Red" button to select "VIDEO". ③ Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select a title. – Multiple editing (⇒ below, Tips) 4 Press [OPTION] to display the menu list. - Items that cannot be selected are grey.

graph TD A["Delete"] --> B["Properties"] B --> C["Edit"] D["Enter Title Name"] --> E["Set up Protection"] E --> F["Cancel Protection"] F --> G["Partial Delete"] G --> H["Change Thumbnail"] H --> I["Divide Title"] J["TV Guide Explorer"] --> K["Create Group"] K --> L["Release Grouping"] L --> M["Chapt…

If you select "Chapter View" (⇒ 49)

Notes

  • You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
  • +R +R DL Management information is recorded in unused sections when you edit discs. The available space on these discs decreases each time you edit their contents. We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to discs.

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To view other pages

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK]. – You can also press [|◀◀, ▶▶] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete, Set up Protection, Cancel Protection)

Select with [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶], then press [■■]. (Repeat.)

– A check mark appears. Press [III] again to cancel.

Title Operations

Delete

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Use to delete unneeded titles.

Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

Perform steps ① – ④ of “Accessing the Title View” (⇒ left).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Delete", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [◀] to select "Delete", then press [OK] to confirm.

Notes

  • HDD RAM Deleting an item increases the available disc space by the amount of space taken by the item deleted.
  • -R -R DL +R +R DL Available disc space does not increase after deletion.
  • -RW(V) +RW Available disc space increases when you delete the last title (the recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted). ● Available disc space may not increase after deleting a short title.
  • HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW To recover total disc space, the disc needs to be formatted. (⇒ 68)

Properties

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

To view title information (e.g., date, time)

Perform steps ① - ④ of "Accessing the Title View" (⇒ left).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Properties", then press [OK].

Delete Properties Edit TV Guide Explorer Create Group Release Grouping Chapter View Display Properties Football No. 001 Time 18:07 Date 12/11/2006 SUN Rec time 2:15 SP) Channel TS Genre Sport OK RETURN

Tips

  • HDD You can also press [STATUS] to display the "Properties" screen when a title with "info" on the bottom of the All Titles or Grouped Titles screen is selected.

Enter Title Name

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

You can give a name for the title.

Perform steps ① – ④ of “Accessing the Title View” (⇒ left).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Enter Title Name", then press [OK].

Entering Text (⇒ 46)

- HDD Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.

Set up Protection/Cancel Protection

HDD RAM +R +R DL +RW

Use to prevent accidental erasure of titles.

Perform steps ① - ④ of "Accessing the Title View" (⇒ 47).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Set up Protection" or "Cancel Protection", then press [OK]. ⑦ Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM +R +R DL +RW - 1

Partial Delete

HDD RAM

Use to remove unwanted parts of titles, such as commercials. Important: Once deleted, the parts cannot be recovered.

Perform steps ① - ④ of "Accessing the Title View" (⇒ 47).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Partial Delete", then press [OK].

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM - 1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM - 2

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete HDD GOB PLAY Start End Next Finish 0:43.21 Start End

7 Press [OK] to set the "Start" point and then press [OK] again to set the "End" point of the section you want to erase.

  • For quicker editing (see Tips below)
  • To delete multiple sections:

Press [▲, ▼] to select "Next", and repeat this step.

⑧ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Finish", then press [OK]. ⑨ Press [◀] to select "Delete", then press [OK] to confirm.

Notes

  • You may not be able to specify start and end points within 3 seconds of each other.
  • Available disc space may not increase after erasing short parts of titles.

Change Thumbnail

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Changes the thumbnail picture shown in the Title View screen.

Perform steps ① - ④ of "Accessing the Title View" (→ 47).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Change Thumbnail", then press [OK].

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW - 1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW - 2

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail @HDD 008 Video Change Finish 0:00.01 Change Start play and select the image of a thumbnail.

⑦ Press [▶] (PLAY) to start play. ⑧ Press [OK] at the point you want to use as the thumbnail.

  • For quicker editing (see Tips below)
  • To change the thumbnail:

Restart play and press [▲, ▼] to select "Change", then press [OK] at the point you want to use as the thumbnail.

9 Press [▲, ▼] to select "Finish", then press [OK].

Divide Title

HDD RAM

You can divide a title into two.

Once divided, titles cannot be recombined.

Perform steps ① – ④ of “Accessing the Title View” (⇒ 47).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Divide Title", then press [OK].

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM - 1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM - 2

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title @HDD GOB PLAY Preview Divide Finish 0:00.00 Divide

⑦ Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.

  • For quicker editing (⇒ below, Tips)
  • Selecting "Preview", then pressing [OK] plays the title from 10 seconds prior, to 10 seconds after the division point.
  • To change the point to divide at:

Press [▲, ▼] to select "Divide", then press [▶] (PLAY) to bring to the point where you want to divide, then press [OK].

⑧ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Finish", then press [OK]. 9 Press [◀] to select "Divide", then press [OK].

– The title is divided at that point.

Notes

  • Divided titles retain the name of the original.
  • A short amount of video and audio just before and after the division point get cut out.
  • You cannot divide a title when the resulting parts are too short or total number of titles exceeds 99. • HDD Divided titles form a group of titles.

Tips

For quicker editing

  • Use Search (⇒ 37) or Time Slip (⇒ 37) to find the desired point.
  • To skip to the start or end of a title/chapter press [◀◀] (start) or [▶▶] (end).
  • For better precision, use Slow-motion (→ 37) and Frame-by-Frame (→ 37).

HDD RAM

When creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you can easily reach the head of scene using [|◀◀, ▶▶] (SKIP) or play on Chapter View.

Tips

- Chapter

Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.

Title Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter

- HDD RAM: You can change the order of chapters and create a Playlist (Video) (⇒ 50).

"Chapter Creation" in the Setup menu (⇒ 72)

"Automatic":

Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the end of the programme) in the scene during recording and sets chapter start points on them automatically.

- Depending on the programme to be recorded or the Recording Mode, the chapter start points may not be created correctly.

"5 minutes":

Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at approximately 5-minute intervals.

• Maximum numbers of chapters on a disc

HDD: Approx. 1000 per title

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V): Approx. 1000

+R | +R DL | +RW : Approx. 254

Accessing the Chapter View

Allows viewing and editing chapters individually.

① Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive. ② Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. HDD RAM When "VIDEO" is not selected, press the "Red" button to select "VIDEO". ③ Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select a title. ④ Press [OPTION] to display the OPTION menu. ⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Chapter View" then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select a chapter. - Multiple editing (⇒ right, Tips) 7a To play Press [OK]. 7b To edit Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Accessing the Chapter View - 1

Refer to "Chapter Operations" (⇒ right).

You can go back to the Title View.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Accessing the Chapter View - 2

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To view other pages

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK].

- You can also press [|◀◀, ▶▶] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete Chapter)

Select with [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶], then press [■■]. (Repeat.)

- A check mark appears. Press [■] again to cancel.

Chapter Operations

Delete Chapter

You can delete the chapters for each title.

Important: Once deleted, recorded contents cannot be recovered.

Perform steps 1 - 7b of "Accessing the Chapter View" (see left).

Press [▲, ▼] to select "Delete Chapter", then press [OK]. Press [◀] to select "Delete", then press [OK].

Create Chapter

You can divide a title into multiple chapters.

Perform steps 1 - 7b of "Accessing the Chapter View" (see left).

Press [▲, ▼] to select "Create Chapter", then press [OK].

Delete Chapter Create Chapter Combine Chapters Title View DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter HDD 008 PLAY Create Finish 0:43.21

Press [OK] at the point you want to divide. - For quicker editing (see 48, Tips) - Repeat this step to create additional chapters. Press [▲, ▼] to select "Finish", then press [OK].

Notes

- A short portion of the title just after the creation point may be lost.

Combine Chapters

You can combine the divided chapters.

Perform steps 1 - 7b of "Accessing the Chapter View" (see left).

Press [▲, ▼] to select "Combine Chapters", then press [OK]. Press [◀] to select "Combine", then press [OK]. - The selected chapter gets combined with the next chapter.

HDD RAM

-RW(VR) (play only)

You can create Playlists (Video) by grouping your favourite scenes (chapters) from the recorded titles and edit the created Playlists (Video).

Tips

HDD RAM

A Playlist (Video) is a compilation of your favourite chapters as shown in the chart below.

graph TD A["Title"] --> B["Chapter"] B --> C["Title"] C --> D["Chapter"] D --> E["Title"] F["Playlist (Video)"] --> G["Chapter"] G --> H["Chapter"] H --> I["Title"]

Copying (⇒ 57) a Playlist (Video) will create a title.

  • Editing Playlists (Video) doesn't modify titles.
  • Playlists (Video) are not recorded separately so this doesn't use much capacity.

Accessing the Playlist (Video) View

Preparation:

  • Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded title to be edited.
  • RAM Release protection (→ 68, Setting Protection).

With the unit stopped

① Press [FUNCTION MENU]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Others", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Playlists", then press [OK].

graph LR A["Playback"] --> B["Recording"] B --> C["Delete"] C --> D["Copy"] D --> E["TV Guide"] E --> F["Other"] F --> G["Drive Select"] H["Playlists"] --> I["Playlists"] J["Playlists"] --> K["Playlists"] L["Playlists"] --> M["Playlists"] N["Playlists"] --> O["Playlists"] P["Playlists"] --> Q["Playl…

HDD

When "VIDEO" is not selected, press the "Red" button to select "VIDEO".

4a To play

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the Playlists (Video) to play, then press [OK].

4b To create

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Create", then press [OK] (⇒ right, Creating Playlists (Video)).

4c To edit

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the Playlists (Video), then press [OPTION].

- Multiple editing (→ 51, Tips in "Edit")

HDD

graph TD A["Delete"] --> B["Properties"] B --> C["Edit"] D["Create"] --> E["Copy"] E --> F["Enter Name"] F --> G["Change Thumbnail"] H["Chapter View"] --> I["PICTURE"] J["Refer to “Editing Playlists (Video)/Chapters” (→ right)"]

If you select "Chapter View" (⇒ 51)

Creating Playlists (Video)

HDD RAM

Perform steps 1 - 4b of "Accessing the Playlist (Video) View". (⇒ left)

⑤ Press [◀, ▶] to select the source title, then press [▼]. – Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to step ⑦. ⑥ Press [◀, ▶] to select the source chapter you want to add to a Playlist (Video), then press [OK].

- Press [▲] to cancel

- Press [OPTION] to select "Create Chapter", then press [OK] if you want to create a new chapter in the source title (⇒ 49).

⑦ Press [◀, ▶] to select the position to insert the chapter, then press [OK].

- Press [▲] repeatedly to return to step 5, if you want to add additional source titles.

Chapters are registered to the Playlist (Video). Repeat steps ⑥ and ⑦ to add other chapters.

⑧ Press [RETURN 3] to finish and exit the screen.

Notes

  • Playlists (Video) cannot be created while recording or copying.
  • You are allowed a maximum of 99 Playlists (Video), with approximately 1000 chapters per Playlist (Video).

Editing Playlists (Video)/Chapters

Delete

HDD RAM

Use to delete unneeded Playlists (Video).

Important: Once deleted, Playlists (Video) contents cannot be recovered (titles are not affected).

Perform steps 1 - 4c of "Accessing the Playlist (Video) View". ( ⇒ left)

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Delete", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [◀] to select "Delete", then press [OK] to confirm.

Tips

To delete during play

  1. Press [DELETE ×]. A confirmation message displays.
  2. Press [◀] to select "Delete", then press [OK] to confirm.

Properties

HDD RAM -RW(VR)

Playlist (Video) information (e.g., length and date) is shown.

Perform steps 1 - 4c of "Accessing the Playlist (Video) View". (⇒ left)

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].

Tips

To exit the screen

Press [OK].

Edit

HDD RAM

You can create and copy Playlists (Video), and change the thumbnail.

Perform steps 1 - 4c of "Accessing the Playlist (Video) View" (⇒ 50).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit", then press [OK].

⑥ Press [▲, ▼] to select the desired operation from the menu displayed, then press [OK] (⇒ below).

Create1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Create”, then press [OK]. (⇨ 50, Creating Playlists (Video))
Copy1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].2 Press [◀] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
Enter Name1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Enter Name”, then press [OK].2 Enter a name for the Playlists (Video). (⇨ 46, Entering Text).
Change Thumbnail1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Change Thumbnail”, then press [OK].2 Press [▶] (PLAY). Use Time Slip (⇨ 37), Slow-motion (⇨ 37), Frame-by-Frame (⇨ 37), or Search (⇨ 37) to find the desired point.3 Press[OK] at the image you wish you use for your thumbnail.4 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].– The thumbnail picture is now changed.

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [EXIT].

To view other pages

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK].

- You can also press [|◀◀, ▶▶] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete, Copy)

Select with [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶], then press [■]. (Repeat.)

- A check mark appears. Press [■] again to cancel.

Chapter View

HDD RAM

You can add, move, divide, combine or delete chapters in the Playlists (Video).

Perform steps 1 - 4c of "Accessing the Playlist (Video) View" (see page 50).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Chapter View", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select a chapter. - Multiple editing (see right, Tips) 7a To play: Press [OK]. 7b To edit: Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM - 1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM - 2

Refer to "Chapter Operations" (see right).

You can go back to the Playlist View.

Chapter Operations

Add Chapter1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Add Chapter”, then press [OK]. (⇒ 50, Creating Playlists (Video))
Move Chapter1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Move Chapter”, then press [OK].2 Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the position to insert the chapter, then press [OK].PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM - 3
Create Chapter1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Create Chapter”, then press [OK].2 Press [▶] (PLAY). Use Time Slip (⇒ 37), Slow-motion (⇒ 37), Frame-by-Frame (⇒ 37), or Search (⇒ 37) to find the desired point.3 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.4 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
Combine Chapters1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Combine Chapters”, then press [OK].2 Press [◀] to select “Combine”, then press [OK].– The selected chapter gets combined with the next chapter.
Delete Chapter1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Delete Chapter”, then press [OK].2 Press [◀] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [EXIT].

To view other pages

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK].

- You can also press [◀◀, ▶▶] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete Chapter)

Select with [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶], then press [■]. (Repeat.)

- A check mark appears. Press [■] again to cancel.

Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View

HDD RAM -R (JPEG)

You can edit pictures and albums.

Preparation:

  • Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD drive. • RAM Release protection (⇒ 68, Setting Protection)

① Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

HDD RAM When "PICTURE" is not selected, press the "Green" button to select "PICTURE".

Editing an album:

2a Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ►] to select the album.

  • Multiple editing (⇒ below, Tips)
  • When you want to create an album using "Create Album", press [OPTION] without selecting album.

Editing a still picture:

2b 1. Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the album which contains the still picture to edit, then press [OK].

  1. Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the still picture.
  2. Multiple editing (⇒ below, Tips)

③ Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.

  • Items that cannot be selected are grey. e.g., HDD Editing an album

Start Slideshow Slideshow Settings

→Refer to "Start Slideshow"/ "Slideshow Settings"(⇒ 39)

graph TD A["Add Pictures"] --> B["Create Album"] B --> C["Edit Album"] C --> D["Copy to DVD"] E["Delete Album"] --> F["Change Date"] F --> G["Set up Protection"] G --> H["Cancel Protection"] I["Playlist View"] --> J["VIDEO/MUSIC"] J --> K["Switch to Playlist (39)"]

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - ③ Press [OPTION] to display the menu list. - 2

e.g., HDD Editing a still picture

Delete Pictures Properties Change Date Set up Protection Cancel Protection Album View Refer to "Album (still picture)/Picture Operations" (⇒ right). You can go back to the Album

Notes

  • You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
  • You cannot edit still pictures recorded on finalised DVD-R.

Tips

To view other pages

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK].

You can also press [◀◀, ▶▶] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

[Only Delete Album, Delete Pictures, Change Date (Only when the "Picture (JPEG) View" screen is displayed), Set up Protection, Cancel Protection, Copy to DVD, Copy to HDD]

Select with [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶], then press [■]. (Repeat.) – A check mark appears. Press [■] again to cancel.

To select all albums

Press [■]. After the confirmation message appears, press [◀] to select "Yes".

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the menu screens

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Album (still picture)/Picture Operations

Notes

- Timer recordings do not start when performing "Change Date", "Copy to DVD", "Copy to HDD", "Add Pictures", or "Create Album".

Add Pictures/Create Album

HDD RAM

Perform steps 1 – 3 of "Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View" (see left).

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Add Pictures" or "Create Album", then press [OK]. ⑤ Press [◀] to select "Start" or "Yes", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the album containing the picture to add, then press [OK]. ⑦ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Select pictures to copy" or "Copy all pictures", then press [OK]. - If "Select pictures to copy" is selected: Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the picture, then press [OK]. - If "Copy all pictures" is selected: All the still pictures in the album will be copied.

⑧ Press [▶] to select "No" to finish copying, then press [OK].

- If you want to continue copying, select "Yes", then repeat steps 6 - 7.

Only when you select "Create Album"

9 Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes" or "No", then press [OK].

  • If "Yes" is selected You can give a name for the album ( ⇒ 46, Entering Text).
  • If "No" is selected The album name is automatically given.

Notes

- RAM "Add Pictures" is available only for the folders conforming to DCF.

Delete Album/Delete Pictures

HDD RAM

-R (JPEG)

Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

  • When deleting an album, non-picture files in the album will also be deleted. (This does not apply to subordinate folders in the album.)
  • -R Available space does not increase even after pictures are deleted.

Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View” ( ⇔ left).

- When editing an album, press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit Album", then press [OK] after step ③.

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Delete Album" or "Delete Pictures", then press [OK].

⑤ Press [◀] to select "Delete", then press [OK].

Notes

- If you want to delete sample pictures, perform "Cancel Protection" and then delete them. (→ 53)

Enter Album Name

HDD RAM

Perform steps ① – ③ of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View” (⇒ 52).

- When editing an album, press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit Album", then press [OK] after step ③.

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Enter Album Name", then press [OK].

- You can give a name for the album (⇒ 46, Entering Text).

Notes

- Album names entered using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.

Change Date

HDD RAM

You can change the date of this picture.

Perform steps ① – ③ of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View” (⇒ 52).

- When editing an album, press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit Album", then press [OK] after step ③.

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Change Date", then press [OK].

⑤ Press [◀, ▶] to select the item, then press [▲, ▼] to change.

⑥ Press [OK].

Set up Protection/Cancel Protection

HDD RAM

Set protection to prevent pictures from being accidentally deleted.

- When editing an album, press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit Album", then press [OK] after step ③.

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Set up Protection" or "Cancel Protection", then press [OK].

⑤ Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

- The lock symbol "🔒" appears when the still picture or album is protected.

Notes

- Even if you set protection using this unit, the album may be deleted by other equipment.

Copy to DVD/Copy to HDD

HDD RAM

Perform steps ① – ③ of "Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View" (⇒ 52).

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy to DVD" or "Copy to HDD", then press [OK].

5 For copy to DVD-RAM or HDD Press [◀, ▶] to select "Start", then press [OK]. For copy to DVD-R Press [◀, ▶] to select "Copy & Finalise" or "Copy Only", then press [OK].

Notes

- When copying to DVD-R, use blank discs or unfinalised discs on which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.

Properties

HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB

Information (e.g., image size and file size) is shown.

Perform steps ① – ③ of "Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View" (⇒ 52).

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Properties", then press [OK].

• To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

Accessing the Album and Track View

HDD

Preparation:

- Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

① Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

- When "MUSIC" is not selected, press the "Yellow" button to select "MUSIC".

2a Press [▲, ▼] to select the album, then press [OPTION].

Editing a track

2b 1. Press [▲, ▼] to select the album, then press [OK].

  1. Press [▲, ▼] to select the track, then press [OPTION].

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select the operation, then press [OK].

To edit the album (Music)graph TD A["Delete Album"] --> B["Album and Track Operation (⇒ below)"] C["Enter Album Name"] --> B D["Repeat Play Setting"] --> B E["Track View"] --> F["Useful functions during music play (⇒ 41)"] G["Sort"] --> F

→ below

To edit the track (Music)graph TD A["Delete Track"] --> B["Properties"] B --> C["Enter Track Name"] C --> D["Enter Artist Name"] D --> E["Repeat Play Setting"] E --> F["Album View"] F --> G["Album and Track Operation (→ below)"] G --> H["You can go back to Album View"]

Useful functions during music play (⇒ 41)

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN $]

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Album and Track Operation

After performing steps ① - ③ (⇒ above)

Delete Album Delete TrackPress [◀, ▶] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].• Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored.Make certain before proceeding.
Enter Album Name Enter Track NameYou can give names to albums and tracks. (⇒ 46, Entering Text)
Enter Artist Name You can edit the artist name of the track. (⇒ 46, Entering Text)

Notes

  • When the timer recording starts, "Delete Album" and "Delete Track" stops on the way.
  • "Sample Music" is not displayed on the MUSIC screen.

Deleting still pictures and music using DELETE Navigator

Preparation:

• RAM Release protection (⇒ 68, Setting Protection)

HDD RAM -R (JPEG)

Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

① Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive. ② Press FUNCTION MENU. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Delete", then press [OK]. ④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Picture" or "Music", then press [OK].

D10A FUNCTION MENU HDD Playback Recording Delete Copy TV Guide Inserts Drive Select Music Remain 30:00 SP Video Picture Music

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - HDD RAM -R (JPEG) - 2

DELETE Navigator Album View HDD Previous Page 01/01 Next

Deleting an album:

5a Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the item, then press [DELETE *].

Deleting a still picture or track:

1. Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the album that contains the still picture or track to delete, then press [OK]. 2. Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the still picture or track, then press [OK]. 3. Press [◀, ▶] to select "Delete", then press [OK].

Notes

- You cannot delete while recording or copying.

Tips

To view other pages [Album (still picture) and still picture only]

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK].

- You can also press [|◀◀, ▶▶] to view other pages.

Multiple editing [Album (still picture) and still picture only]

Select with [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶], then press [■]. (Repeat.)

- A check mark appears. Press [■] again to cancel.

- HDD RAM: Deleting an item increases the available space by the amount of space taken by the item deleted.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN]

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Picture)

HDD

You can create Playlists (Picture) by grouping your favourite still pictures in albums stored on HDD and edit the Playlists (Picture).

Tips

A Playlist (Picture) is a compilation of your favourite still pictures as shown in the chart below.

Album 1

Album 2

graph TD A["Still picture"] --> B["Still picture"] C["Still picture"] --> D["Still picture"] E["Still picture"] --> F["Still picture"] G["Still picture"] --> H["Still picture"] I["Still picture"] --> J["Still picture"] K["Still picture"] --> L["Still picture"] M["Still picture"] --> N["Still picture…

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Tips - 2

Copying (=> 57) a Playlist (Picture) will create an album. (Background Music cannot be copied.)

  • Editing still pictures in a Playlist (Picture) doesn't modify source albums or source still pictures.
  • Playlists (Picture) are not recorded separately so this doesn't use much capacity.

Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View

Preparation:

- Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

With the unit stopped

① Press [FUNCTION MENU]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Others", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Playlists", then press [OK].

DIGA FUNCTION MENU HDD Playback Recording Delete Copy TV Guide Others Drive Script PlayInfo PlayInfo Inc. HDD Management Stop Playset

FUNCTION NEW HDD Playback Recording Delete Copy TV Guide Others Drive Select Remain: 31:30 SP PlayBack Delete Rec HDD Management Scope

When "PICTURE" is not selected, press the "Green" button to select "PICTURE".

4a To play

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the Playlist (Picture) to play, then press [▶] (PLAY).

4b To create

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Create", then press [OK] (⇒ right, Creating Playlists (Picture)).

4c To edit a Playlist (Picture)

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the Playlist (Picture), then press [OPTION].

- Multiple editing (→ 56, Tips in "Editing Playlists (Picture)")

graph TD A["Start Slideshow"] --> B["(→ 56, Start Slideshow/Slideshow Settings)"] C["Delete"] --> D["Create"] E["Edit"] --> F["Copy"] G["Copy to DVD"] --> H["Enter Playlist Name"] I["Album View"] --> J["Album (still picture)/Picture Operations"] K["VIDEO"] --> J D --> J F --> J H --> J J --> L["(→ 5…

Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Video) (⇒ 50)

4d To edit a still picture

① Select the Playlist (Picture) which contains still pictures to edit, then press [OK]. ② Select the still pictures to edit, then press [OPTION].

- Multiple editing (→ 56, Tips in "Editing still pictures")

graph TD A["Properties"] --> B["Adding Pictures"] B --> C["Move Pictures"] C --> D["Delete Pictures"] D --> E["Playlist View"] E --> F["You can go back to Playlist View (Picture)."] style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

Creating Playlists (Picture)

Perform steps 1 - 4 of "Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View". (⇒ left)

⑤ Press [◀, ▶] to select an album (a folder) in "Source Albums", then press [▼].

  • Press [OK] to select all still pictures in the album, then skip to step 8.
  • Press [▲] to cancel.

⑥ Press [◀, ▶] to select the still picture you want to add to a Playlist (Picture), then press [Ⅱ].

- A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

Press [■] again to cancel.

⑦ Press [OK]

⑧ Press [◀, ▶] to select the position to insert the still picture, then press [OK].

- Press [▲] to select other "Source Albums", then repeat steps ⑤–⑧ to add pictures in other albums.

9 Press [RETURN]

⑩ Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes" if you want to name the Playlist (Picture).

- Entering Text ⇒ 46

⑪ Select the Background Music if you want to change Background Music.

- If "No" is selected, Sample Music is set for Background Music.

① Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes", then press [OK]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select the storage location of Background Music, then press [OK].

- "Sample Music" is Background Music pre-installed on HDD.

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select an album for Background Music, then press [OK] when selecting other than "Sample Music". - Background Music on Playlists (Picture) can be specified for each Playlist (Picture). (⇒ 56)

All the selected pictures become a Playlist (Picture).

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ≠

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Notes

  • Playlists (Picture) cannot be created or edited while recording or copying.
  • You are allowed a maximum of 99 Playlists (Picture), with approximately 3000 pictures per Playlist (Picture).

Editing Playlists (Picture)

Start Slideshow

Perform steps 1 - 4c of "Accessing the Playlist (Picture)

View". (⇒ 55)

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Start Slideshow", then press [OK].

(See 39, Start Slideshow, Steps ①-②)

Notes

- You cannot select multiple Playlists (Picture) or all Playlists (Picture).

Slideshow Settings

Perform steps 1 - 4c of "Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View". (See 55)

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Slideshow Settings", then press [OK].

(See 40, Slideshow Settings)

Notes

  • Slideshow Settings are retained only for the specified Playlist (Picture).
  • Music CD (CD-DA) is used for Background Music when inserting Music CD.

Delete

Use to delete unneeded Playlists (Picture).

Important: Once deleted, Playlist (Picture) contents cannot be recovered (still pictures are not affected).

Perform steps 1 - 4c of "Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View". (See 55)

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Delete", then press [OK].

⑥ Press [◀] to select "Delete", then press [OK] to confirm.

Tips

To delete during play

. Press [DELETE *]. A confirmation message displays.

. Press [◀] to select "Delete", then press [OK] to confirm.

Edit

You can create and copy Playlists (Picture).

Perform steps 1 - 46 of "Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View" (→ 55).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Edit", then press [OK].

⑥ Press [▲, ▼] to select desired operation from the menu displayed location, then press [OK] (⇒ below).

Create1Press [▲,▼] to select “Create”, then press [OK]. (⇒ 55, Creating Playlists (Picture))
Copy1Press [▲,▼] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].2Press [◀] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
Enter Playlist Name1Press [▲,▼] to select “Enter Playlist Name”, then press [OK].2 Enter a name for the Playlist (Picture). (⇒ 46, Entering Text).

Copy to DVD

Perform steps 1 - 4c of "Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View" (55).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy to DVD", then press [OK].

6a For copy to DVD-RAM

Press [◀, ▶] to select "Start", then press [OK].

6b For copy to DVD-R

Press [◀, ▶] to select "Copy & Finalise" or "Copy Only", then press [OK].

Notes

- When copying to DVD-R, use blank discs or unfinalised discs on which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [EXIT].

To view other pages

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK].

- You can also press [|◀◀, ▶▶] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete, Copy to DVD, Copy)

Select with [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶], then press [■]. (Repeat.)

– A check mark appears. Press [■■] again to cancel.

Editing still pictures

You can add, move or delete still pictures in the Playlist (Picture). Perform steps 1 – 4d of "Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View" (→ 55).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select the desired operation from the menu displayed location, then press [OK] (⇒ below).

Properties1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Properties”, then press [OK]. (⇒ 52, Album (still picture)/Picture Operations)
Add Pictures1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Add Pictures”, then press [OK]. (⇒ 55, Creating Playlists (Picture))
Move Pictures1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Move Pictures”, then press [OK].2 Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the position to insert the still picture, then press [OK].PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Editing still pictures - 1
Delete Pictures1 Press [▲, ▼] to select “Delete Pictures”, then press [OK].2 Press [◀] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [EXIT].

To view other pages

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK]. – You can also press [|◀◀, ▶▶] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete Pictures)

Select with [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶], then press [■]. (Repeat.)

- A check mark appears. Press [■] again to cancel.

Copying titles or Playlists (Video)

With this unit, you can select a copy method from the two types listed below. (About copying still pictures ⇒ 64)

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]

Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult settings. (→ 59)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] - 1

Advanced Copy

Make a copy list and then copy. You can set the unit to copy titles or Playlists (Video) in the way you want. (⇒ 60)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Advanced Copy - 1

Features

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] Advanced Copy
Copy direction HDD → DVD
DVD → HDD -○RAM -RW(VR) +RWDVD-V (Only from a finalised disc)
High speed mode copy*1(⇒ below, Important)○DVD-V You cannot perform high-speed copy with finalised discs.+RW You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.
Changing recording mode-○*2
Finalise*3-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DLAutomatically finalised-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DLCan be selected
High speed modeNormal speed modeHigh speed modeNormal speed mode
Copying Playlists (Video) *4--
Are chapters maintained?-*5-*5
Are thumbnails maintained?-*6○*7-*6
Recording or Playing while Copying--○*8-

○: Can do, -: Cannot do

Important

*1 To high speed copy titles (or Playlists (Video) created from those titles), set "Recording Format" to "Video format" before recording to the HDD (The default setting is "Video format". ⇒ 72). However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work. ●Playlists (Video) created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode. - Playlists (Video) mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby® Digital and LPCM, etc.) - Titles that contain many deleted segments - Titles that have been copied to the HDD from a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD (SD Video) - When making a copy of multiple titles that were recorded with "Recording Format" set to "Video format" and "VR format" • +R +R DL +RW Titles recorded in "EP" mode and "FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)" mode (Displayed → 58) ● +R +R DL +RW Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect - -R -R DL -RW(V) Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using "EP" mode or "FR" (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode

※2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent against degradation of picture quality.) +R DL You cannot copy in "EP" or "FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)" mode.

※3 You cannot select "Top Menu" or "Auto-Play Select".

If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select "Top Menu" or "Auto-Play Select" in "DVD Management" before copying (⇒ 68).

*4 You cannot copy Playlists (Video) with a play time more than 8 hours.

When you copy a Playlists (Video) it will become a title in the destination drive.

※5 RAM -R DL +R DL +RW: One title becomes one chapter.

-R -RW(V) +R: Chapters are created automatically (-R -RW(V) about 5-minute chapters +R about 8-minute chapters) when finalising after copying the disc.

*6 Thumbnails return to the default position.

※7 When copying Playlists (Video), the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.

It is possible to record programmes to the HDD or play back titles or Playlists (Video) on the HDD.

However, this is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation.

- You cannot perform chasing play or editing, etc. while copying.

- You cannot play a Playlist (Video) while copying titles with "One time only recording" restriction (see page 24).

- Still pictures or music cannot be played.

Approximate copying times (Max. speed)

(Excludes time required to write data management information.)

HDD5X Speed DVD-RAM12X Speed DVD-R ※1 4X Speed DVD-R DL ※2 4X Speed DVD-RW ※3 8X Speed +R ※4 4X Speed +R DL ※2 4X Speed +RW
Recording ModeRecorded
Required timeSpeedRequired timeSpeedRequired timeSpeedRequired timeSpeedRequired timeSpeedRequired timeSpeedRequired timeSpeed
XP1 hour12 min. 5x5 min. 46 s.10x15 min.4x15 min.4x8 min. 20 s.7x15 min.4x15 min.4x
SP6 min. 10x2 min. 30 s.24x7 min. 30 s.8x7 min. 30 s.8x3 min. 45 s.16x7 min. 30 s.8x7 min. 30 s.8x
LP3 min. 20x1 min. 21 s.44x3 min. 45 s.16x3 min. 45 s.16x1 min. 53 s.32x3 min. 45 s.16x3 min. 45 s.16x
EP (6 hours)2 min. 30x58 s. 62x2 min. 30 s.24x2 min. 30 s.24x
EP (8 hours)1 min. 30 s.40x48 s. 75x1 min. 53 s.32x1 min. 57 s.31x
  • The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying a one-hour title from HDD to each disc in the above list supporting High-Speed copying. The amount of time and speed may vary depending on conditions such as the area where information is written or unique features of the disc. *1: In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc. *2: In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL. *3: In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc. *4: In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with an 8X Speed +R disc.

Notes

  • When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
  • Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
  • When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal. If you want copying to be quieter, select "Normal (Silent)" in "DVD Speed for High Speed Copy" in the Setup menu (see page 72).

Copy restrictions

Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)

When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted.

You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.

- When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)

- When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 499 in total.

When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (=> 15)

Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow "One time only recording"

You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (=> 92) compatible DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.

  • Titles or Playlists (Video) cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.
  • Titles will not be copied if they are protected (=> 48).
  • You cannot copy Playlists (Video) created from "One time only recording" titles.
  • Titles with recording limitations and Playlists (Video) cannot be registered on the same copying list.

COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions

The following icons give more information about copy restrictions of the title.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions - 1

Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions - 2

Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) (However, titles and Playlists (Video) cannot be copied in high speed mode to +R or +RW)

+R DL is displayed, but copy cannot be performed, even in normal speed mode.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions - 3

Title with "One time only recording" restriction (→ 24, Copy-once recording)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions - 4

Titles deleted from the HDD by "One time only recording" restriction after copying. (→ 24, Copy-once recording)

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions - 5

Title or Playlists (Video) contains still picture(s) - Still picture(s) cannot be copied.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions - 6

Title or Playlists (Video) recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions - 7

- Titles and Playlists (Video) displaying these marks cannot be selected.

Before copying

Speed and recording mode when copying

HDD ↔ RAM: High speed

HDD → -R | -R DL | -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW : Refer to the

following table.

“Recording Format” setting (⇒ 72)Copy speed
Only titles recorded with “Recording Format” set to “VR format.”High speed
Only titles recorded with “Recording Format” set to “Video format”.Normal speed
When making a copy of multiple titles that were recorded with “Recording Format” set to “Video format” and “VR format”.

In the following cases, even if "Recording Format" is set to "Video format", copy will perform at normal speed.

  • +R +R DL +RW When the copying source was recorded in "EP" or "FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)" mode.
  • When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
  • When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:

- +R +R DL +RW - -R -R DL -RW(V) copying source was recorded in "EP" or "FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)" mode.

Preparation:

  • Insert a disc that you can use for copying (→ 15, 18).
  • Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
  • Titles and Playlists (Video) recorded using a different encoding system (PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be copied.
  • -R Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.
  • -R Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video already recorded on it.

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]

DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL are automatically finalised (→ 92). After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

HDD → RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)

① Press [FUNCTION MENU]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Video (HDD to DVD)", then press [OK].

COPY Navigator All Titles HDD Total: 0 Disc Space: 4310MB Total Size: 0MB (0%) Channel Date Day Title Name Time 001 BBC 25/9 FRI 13:30 002 BBC1 27/9 SAT 12:15 003 AV2 3/10 FRI 20:00 004 BBC 3/10 FRI 22:05 005 AV2 4/10 SAT 16:10 006 BBC2 10/10 FRI 9:25 007 BBC 10/10 FRI 13:30 008 BBC 11/10 SAT 21:00…

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select the title you want to copy, then press [■].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

- Press [11] again to cancel.

5 Press [OK].

⑥ Press [◀] to select "Start", then press [OK].

Notes

- When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR. (However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode, copy will not be performed.)

Check the properties of a title and sort COPY Navigator

Perform steps ①—③ of "Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]".

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select the title, then press [OPTION].

COPY Navigator All Titles HDD Total: 0 100 Channel Date Day Time Title Name 001 BBC 24/3 FRI 13:30 002 BBC 27/9 SAT 12:15 003 AV2 3/10 FRI 25:00 004 BBC 3/10 FRI 22:05 005 AV2 4/10 SAT 16:10 006 BBC 10/10 FRI 3:25 007 BBC 10/10 FRI 13:30 008 BBC 11/10 SAT 21:00 Properties Page 01/01 Sort Group Title

PropertiesPress [▲,▼] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are shown.HDD You can also press [STATUS 1] to display the “Properties” screen when a title with “1 Info” on the bottom of the All Titles or Grouped Titles screen is selected.
Sort(All Titles screen only)1 Press [▲,▼] to select “Sort”, then press [OK].2 Press [▲,▼] to select the item, then press [OK].This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to display titles by No., channel, recording date, day, recording start time and title name. (You cannot select this item if a title has a check mark.) If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is cancelled.

Notes

- If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them. To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and then copy the contents of the list (⇒ 60).

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ➤].

To stop copying (⇒ 61)

COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions (⇒ 58)

Copying using the copying list — Advanced Copy

HDD ↔ RAM +RW

-RW(VR) → HDD

HDD → -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

You can order titles and Playlists (Video) as desired for copy to disc.

See also "Before copying" (⇒ 59).

① Press [FUNCTION MENU]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Advanced Copy", then press [OK].

Copy Cancel All 1 Copy Direction HDD DVD 2 Copy Mode VIDEO High Speed 3 Create List Start Copying Source HDD Destination DVD Select the copy direction.

- If you are not going to change the registered list, press [▼] several times (→ step 7).

④ Set the copy direction.

- If you are not going to change the copying direction, press [▼] (⇒ step 5).

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy Direction", then press [▶]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Source", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select the drive, then press [OK]. ④ Press [◀] to confirm.

⑤ Set the recording mode.

- If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [▼] (⇒ step 6).

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy Mode", then press [▶]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Format", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "VIDEO", then press [OK]. ④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Recording Mode", then press [OK]. ⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select the mode, then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [◀] to confirm.

⑥ Register titles and Playlists (Video) for copy.

  • If you are going to copy a registered list without making any changes to it (⇒ step 7). ① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Create List", then press [▶].

Copy Cancel All 1 Copy Direction HDD → DVD 2 Copy Mode VIDEO High Speed 3 Create List Start Copying Destination Capacity: 434MB Size: 0KB (0%) No. Size Name of item New Item (Total=0) Page M/1 Create copy list. OPTION

② Press [▲, ▼] to select "New item", then press [OK]. ③ Press the "Red" button to select "VIDEO" or press the "Blue" button to select "Playlists".

Create List All Titles HDD VIDEO Playlist 301 06 24097 BDC 1.00% EBI BDC 1.10% SAT Previous Page 02/02 Next OPTION Select Previous Next

④ Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the title or Playlists (Video), then press [■■].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. - Press [11] again to cancel. - The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time. - When you switch between the "VIDEO" and "Playlists" tab, the check mark is cancelled. - When copying to a disc using high speed mode,

-R -R DL -RW(V): only items indicated with "▶" or

“” can be registered.

+R +R DL +RW: only items indicated with "▶▶" can be registered.

- To view other pages (⇒ 57)

⑤ Press [OK] to confirm.

- To edit the copying list (⇒ below)

You cannot start copying when the value of the "Size" exceeds 100% ("Destination Capacity" is not sufficient) (⇒ 61, About the data size for copying).

⑥ Press [◀] to confirm.

⑦ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Start Copying", then press [OK]. ⑧ Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK] to start copying.

HDD → -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

Press [◀, ▶] to select "Copy & Finalise" or "Copy Only", then press [OK].

- If "Copy & Finalise" is selected

After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

Notes

- It is not possible to copy to DVD-R that already contains JPEG files.

Edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6—⑤ (→ above)

⑥—⑥ Press [OPTION].

Delete All
Add
Delete
Move
Delete All Delete all items registered on the copying list.1. Press [▲, ▼] to select “Delete All”, then press [OK].2. Press [◀, ▶] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
AddAdd new items to the copying list.1. Press [▲, ▼] to select “Add”, then press [OK].2. Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the title or Playlists (Video), then press [■■].A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.●Press [■■] again to cancel.3. Press [OK].
DeleteDelete the selected items.1. Press [▲, ▼] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].2. Press [◀, ▶] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
MoveMove selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.1. Press [▲, ▼] to select “Move”, then press [OK].2. Press [▲, ▶] to select the destination, then press [OK].

Cancel all registered copying setting and lists

After performing steps ①—③ (⇒ 60)

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Cancel All", then press [OK].

⑤ Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

- The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

- When a title or playlist (Video), etc. has been recorded or deleted at the copy source

- When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

About the data size for copying

Data size of each registered item

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - About the data size for copying - 1

Data size recorded to the copy destination

- When copying at normal speed, the total data size will change according to the recording mode.

- The total data size shown may be larger than the sum of the data sizes for each registered item, because of data management information being written to the copy destination, etc.

Tips

To view other pages

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK].

You can also press [|◀◀, ▶▶] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] and press [■■]. (Repeat.)

Press [OK] to register to the list.

- A check mark appears. Press [11] again to cancel.

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN \$] for 3 seconds.

(You cannot stop while finalising)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

Recording and playing while copying

You can record or play using the HDD while high speed copying.

(Only when high speed copying without finalising)

Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.

Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.

- To confirm the current progress

Press [STATUS].

Notes

When you stop High-speed copying

All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.

When you stop Normal Speed copying

Copies until the point cancelled. However as for titles with "One time only recording" restriction, only titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD.

- +R DL +R DL If copy is cancelled during the step while temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.

Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, or +RW, the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.

- Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the HDD regardless of the recording drive settings. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)

- To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copying.

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL

DVD-V → HDD

You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.

While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD according to the set time.

- Operations and on-screen displays during copying are also recorded.

- Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying, and cannot be copied.

Preparation:

- Insert the finalised disc (→ 18).

After performing steps 1–5 ("Format" is automatically set to "DVD-Video") (⇒ 60, Copying using the copying list — Advanced Copy)

⑥ Set "Copy Time".

- If you are not going to change the setting (→ step ⑦).

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy Time", then press [▶].

② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Time Setting", then press [OK].

Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Off", then press [OK].

④ Press [◀] to confirm.

Copy will continue until there is not enough available recording space on the HDD.

- Setting the unit to copy according to the set time

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "On", then press [OK].

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy Time", then press [OK].

graph TD A["Copy"] --> B["Cancel All"] B --> C["1 Copy Direction\nOVO → HDD"] C --> D["2 Copy Mode\nOVO/Vides, RF"] D --> E["3 Copy Time"] E --> F["Set the time at few minutes longer."] F --> G["2 hour 00 min."]

⑤ Press [◀, ▶] to select "hour" and "min.", then press [▲, ▼] to set the recording time.

⑥ Press [OK].

⑦ Press [◀] to confirm.

Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after the content being played finishes.

- Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to include the operation time before play begins.

- You can also set the recording time with the numbered buttons.

⑦ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Start Copying", then press [OK].

Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK] to start copying. The disc top menu is displayed.

- Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when "Title 1" is selected from the "Auto-Play Select" menu when finalising the disc (→ 69).

⑧ When the top menu is displayed

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the title you want to start copying, then press [OK].

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Preparation: - 2

While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is reached.)

Copying titles or Playlists (Video)

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN]

To stop copying

Press [■].

You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop copying.

- If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.

Notes

- If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that portion of title is not recorded.

- The screen on the right is recorded at the beginning.

- The content is recorded as one title from the start of the copy to the end.

- If playback does not begin automatically or if the top menu does not display automatically, press [▶] (PLAY) to start.

- Even if you copy a high-quality video/audio DVD, the original picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.

- If you want to copy a title from a finalized DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (⇒ 60, Copying using the copying list — Advanced Copy).

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 1

Copy Video (MPEG2) from video equipment

Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD, etc., can be copied from the camera's HDD to this unit's HDD or DVD-RAM.

(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)

- You cannot play back SD Video in the camera's HDD with this unit.

You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.

- You cannot play back or record while copying SD Video.

graph TD A["Video (MPEG2)"] --> B["HD"] C["VIDEO*"] --> D["HD"] B --> E["USB cable"] D --> E E --> F["USB cable"]

* DVD Video Recording format

Preparation:

  1. Turn on both this unit and the camera.
  2. Connect the camera to this unit with a USB cable.
  3. Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for data transfer (such as "PC CONNECT") on the camera.
  4. Refer to the camera's operating instructions for details.

The display automatically appears when you connect the camera to this unit. (⇒ 38)

Press [▲, ▼] to select "Video (MPEG2)", then press [OK].

Then go to step ⑦ on page 60.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Preparation: - 1

  • SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the copy list.
  • If there are no SD Video on the camera, "Video (MPEG2)" is not displayed.

Copying Still Pictures/Playlist (Picture)

  • You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/CD-RW.
  • When you copy a Playlist (Picture), it will become an album in the destination drive.

Copying using the copying list

HDD RAM ↔ HDD RAM

HDD → -R (JPEG)

① While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Advanced Copy", then press [OK].

graph TD A["1 Copy Direction"] --> B["2 Copy Mode"] B --> C["3 Create List"] C --> D["4 Save Copy Count"] D --> E["Select the copy direction"]

- If you are not going to change the registered list, press [▼] several times (→ step ⑦).

④ Set the copy direction.

- If you are not going to change the copying direction, press [▼] (⇒ step 5).

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy Direction", then press [▶]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Source", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select the drive, then press [OK]. ④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Destination", then press [OK]. ⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select the drive, then press [OK]. The same drive as the copy source can be selected. ⑥ Press [◀] to confirm.

⑤ Set the copy mode.

- If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [▼] (⇒ step 6).

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy Mode", then press [▶]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Format", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "PICTURE", then press [OK]. "Recording Mode" is automatically set to "High Speed". ④ Press [◀] to confirm.

6 Register still pictures and Playlists (Picture) for copy.

  • If you are going to copy a registered list without making any changes to it (→ step 7). You can register still pictures or still picture folders or Playlists (Picture).
  • Individual still pictures and folders/Playlists (Picture) cannot be registered on the same list.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Copying using the copying list - 2

To register individual still pictures

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Create List", then press [▶]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "New item", then press [OK]. ③ HDD → HDD -R (JPEG) RAM

Press the "Green" button to select "PICTURE". Press the "Blue" button to select "Playlists".

④ Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the still picture, then press [■■].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. - Press [11] again to cancel. - When you switch between the "PICTURE" and "Playlists" tab, the check mark is cancelled. - The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time. - To view other pages (→ 63) -To select another folder or Playlists (Picture) (⇒ 63)

⑤ Press [OK] to confirm.

- To edit the copying list (⇒ 63)

⑥ Press [◀] to confirm.

To register on a folder by folder basis (To register Playlists (Picture))

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Create List", then press [▶]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Picture/Folder", then press [OK].

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Copying using the copying list - 3

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Folder", then press [OK]. ④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "New item", then press [OK].

⑤ HDD → HDD -R (JPEG) RAM

Press the "Green" button to select "PICTURE" Press the "Blue" button to select "Playlists".

⑥ Press [▲, ▼] to select the folder or Playlist (Picture), then press [■]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

- Press [11] again to cancel.

- The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

- To view other pages (⇒ right)

⑦ Press [OK] to confirm.

- To edit the copying list (⇒ below)

⑧ Repeat steps ④—⑦ until you select all necessary folders (Playlists (Picture)).

⑨ Press [◀] to confirm.

⑦ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Start Copying", then press [OK].

- Only when copying individual still pictures When specifying another folder as the copying destination, select "Folder".

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Copying using the copying list - 4

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Copying using the copying list - 5

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Copying using the copying list - 6

⑧ Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK] to start copying.

9 For copy to DVD-R Press [◀, ▶] to select "Copy & Finalise" or "Copy Only", then press [OK] to start copying.

Edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6-⑤ (for a still picture) (→ 62) or

⑥—⑦ (for a folder or Playlist (Picture)) (⇒ above)

6—⑥ Press [OPTION].

or

⑥—⑧ Press [OPTION].

Delete All
Add
Delete
Delete All Delete all items registered on the copying list.
1. Press [▲, ▼] to select "Delete All", then press [OK].
2. Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK].
Add Add new items to the copying list.1. Press [▲, ▼] to select "Add", then press [OK].2. Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ►] to select the still picture or folder to be added, then press [■■].A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.●Press [■■] again to cancel.3. Press [OK].
Delete Delete the selected items.1. Press [▲, ▼] to select "Delete", then press [OK].2. Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

Cancel all registered copying setting and lists

After performing steps ①—③ (⇒ 62)

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Cancel All", then press [OK]. ⑤ Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

- The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

- When a title, Playlist (Picture), still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the copy source

- When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

Tips

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN \$] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN]

To view other pages or Playlist (Picture)

Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select "Previous" or "Next", then press [OK].

You can also press [|◀◀, ▶▶] to view other pages.

To select another folder or Playlist (Picture)

After performing step 6-② (⇒ 62, To register individual still pictures)

① HDD → HDD -R (JPEG) RAM Press the "Green" button to select "PICTURE". Press the "Blue" button to select "Playlists".

② Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the "Folder", then press [OK].

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select the folder or Playlists (Picture), then press [OK].

Create List HDD Picture (JPEG) PICTURE Playlist Previous Page 001001 Next OPTION

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Tips - 2

Create List HDD Folder PICTURE Playlists 321 103_DVD 322 103_DVD 323 103_DVD 324 103_DVD Page 01/01 Picture 0012 File 0012 OPTION

You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.

  • Individual still pictures from different folders (Playlists (Picture)) cannot be registered on the same list.
  • It is convenient to create a Playlist (Picture) (→ 55) if you want to register still pictures from different folders on the HDD in the same list.

Notes

  • The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
  • If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (→ 17), copying will stop partway through.
  • You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
  • -R Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.
  • -R Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video already recorded on it.

Copying new still pictures on USB memory—Copy New Pictures

USB → HDD

This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if still pictures are imported from the same USB memory, then only new still pictures will be imported.

① While stopped

Insert the USB memory. (→ 18).

The menu is automatically displayed. (→ 38)

② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Picture (JPEG)", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy New Pictures (JPEG)", then press [OK].

④ Press [◀, ▶] to select "Copy", then press [OK].

Tips

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN \$] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN]

Copying Still Pictures/Playlist (Picture)

Notes

  • This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and all USB memories for USB device. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older information will be deleted.
  • If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum ( ⇒ 17), copying will stop partway through.
  • You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
  • Only DCF-compliant USB media can be used for this function.
  • Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the shooting date in the HDD.

Copying still pictures on the USB memory

Copying all the still pictures

USB

→ HDD

① While stopped, insert the USB memory (⇒ 18). The menu is automatically displayed (⇒ 38). ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Picture (JPEG)", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy All Pictures (JPEG)", then press [OK].

Copy All Pictures Copy from: USB Copy to: HDD Copy all pictures | JPEG | by date. ©2017 EX: ©2017 Copy Cancel

④ Press [◀, ▶] to select "Copy", then press [OK].

Copying using the copying list

USB

→ HDD RAM

① While stopped, insert the USB memory (⇒ 18). The menu is automatically displayed (⇒ 38).

② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Picture (JPEG)", then press [OK].

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy Selected Pictures (JPEG)", then press [OK].

Copy Cancel All 1 Copy Direction Source: USB Copy Mode: FIRIC High Speed Destination: HDD 2 Copy List Start Copying Select the copy direction.

④ Perform steps ④–⑧ on "Copying using the copying list" (⇒ 62).

- Another folder cannot be selected as the copying destination in step 7.

Tips

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN $] for 3 seconds.

Notes

  • Copy Mode is fixed at "PICTURE High Speed".
  • The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same at the copy destination.
  • If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (=> 17), copying will stop partway through.
  • You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
  • Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

Copying music to HDD

You can store the following formats of music data in this unit's HDD.

Music CD (CD-DA)

MP3

You can copy MP3 files from the USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL.

Copying music from a CD

CD → HDD

All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD. (Cannot record track-by-track.)

• One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album. • Audio quality: LPCM - The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300 (Depends on the remaining capacity.) If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that can be recorded will be reduced.

Preparation:

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

① Insert a music CD. The menu is automatically displayed. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy Music", then press [OK]. ③ Press [◀, ▶] to select "Copy", then press [OK]. Recording starts.

Tips

To stop recording

Press and hold [RETURN \$] for 3 seconds.

- The recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be recorded.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN]

Notes

  • While copying, no other operations can be performed. Timer recordings will not proceed.
  • Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc or USB memory. • CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System) restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.

Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL

-R -R DL CD USB (MP3) → HDD

You can copy MP3 files recorded on USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL to the HDD by file or folder.

• One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.

• The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300

The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000

(Depends on the remaining capacity.)

- If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that can be recorded will be reduced.

* Folders with music files (groups) copied to the HDD will be treated as albums.

① While stopped

Insert the USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL (⇒ 18).

The menu is automatically displayed. (⇒ 38)

② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Copy Music (MP3)", then press [OK].

"Copy Direction" and "Copy Mode" are automatically set to "USB→HDD", "DVD→HDD" or "CD→HDD" and "MUSIC High Speed", respectively.

③ Register MP3 files for copy

You can register MP3 files or file folders.

- MP3 files and folders cannot be registered on the same list.

To register individual MP3 files

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Create List", then press [▶].

② Press [▲, ▼] to select "New item", then press [OK].

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select the folder, then press [OK].

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select the MP3 file, then press [■].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

- Press [11] again to cancel.

- The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

⑤ Press [OK].

- To edit the copying list (⇒ right)

⑥ Press [◀] to confirm.

To register on a folder by folder basis

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Create List", then press [▶]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Track / Folder", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Folder", then press [OK]. ④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "New item", then press [OK]. ⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select the folder, then press [■■]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. - Press [11] again to cancel. - The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time. ⑥ Press [OK]. - To edit the copying list (→ right) ⑦ Press [◀] to confirm.

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Start Copying", then press [OK].

For individual files only

- When specifying an existing folder as the copying destination

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Folder", then press [OK]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select the folder, then press [OK].

- When creating a new folder as the copying destination

① Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes", then press [OK]. ② Enter the folder name (see page 46, Entering Text).

⑤ Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

Tips

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN]

Notes

  • The sequence in which the MP3 files are registered on the copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
  • If MP3 files are already contained inside the copy destination folder, the new MP3 files are recorded following the existing MP3 files.
  • If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (see page 17), copying will stop partway through.

To edit the copying list

Select the item in step ③ – ⑤ (for a MP3 file) or ③ – ⑥ (for a folder). (→ left, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)

① Press [OPTION]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select the operation, then press [OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list.

Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list.

① Press [▲, ▼] to select the MP3 file or folder, then press [■■]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

- Press [11] again to cancel selection.

② Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items.

Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps ① – ② (→ left, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)

① Press [▲, ▼] to select "Cancel All", then press [OK]. ② Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

  • The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
  • When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy source
  • When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit, remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

Notes

- If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (⇒ 17), copying will stop partway through.

Accessing the On-Screen Display

When playing discs (except for JPEG discs), you can display and set the options including disc audio, subtitle, image quality, sound effect, Repeat Play, etc. In addition, when receiving the multi-audio broadcast, you can change the audio settings. Menu options will differ based on disc type and contents.

① Press [DISPLAY].Disc Play Picture Sound Other Soundtrack 1 Digital 2/0ch Subtitles Off Audio channel L R Menu Item Setting

② Press [▲, ▼] to select a menu, then press [▶]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select an item, then press [▶]. ④ Press [▲, ▼] to select a setting.

Follow the on-screen prompts to change individual settings.

Notes

- Some settings may not be changeable, based on the unit's current activity (playing, stopped, etc.) and disc contents.

Tips

To exit the on-screen display Press [DISPLAY].

Disc Menu

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR) VCD

You can change the settings of disc audio, subtitle, etc.

Soundtrack

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

The disc's audio attributes appear (see below, Audio attributes).

DVD-V

Select the audio and language (see below, Audio attributes, Soundtrack/Subtitle language).

VCD (SVCD)

Select the soundtrack number.

- Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one audio type.

Subtitles

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)

(Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information) Turn the subtitle on/off.

- Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.

DVD-V

Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (see below, Soundtrack/Subtitle language).

VCD (SVCD)

Turn the subtitle on/off and select "Text" or the subtitle number.

- "Text" or subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple subtitles.

Audio channel

HDD RAM -RW(VR) VCD

Change audio during playback.

LR/L/R

Angle

DVD-V

Change the number to select an angle.

PBC (Playback control, see page 93) VCD

Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.

Soundtrack/Subtitle language

ENG:EnglishDAN:DanishTHA:Thai
FRA:FrenchPOR:PortuguesePOL:Polish
DEU:GermanRUS:RussianCES:Czech
ITA:ItalianJPN:JapaneseSLK:Slovak
ESP:SpanishCHI:ChineseHUN:Hungarian
NLD:DutchKOR:KoreanFIN:Finnish
SVE:SwedishMAL:Malay*:Others
NOR:NorwegianVIE:Vietnamese

Audio attributes

LPCM/Digital/DTS/MPEG: Signal type

k (kHz): Sampling frequency

b (bit): Number of bits

ch (channel): Number of channels

Notes

  • You cannot make a change when there is no recording.
  • Some discs allow changes to soundtracks, subtitles, and angles only by using the disc's menus (see 20).

Play Menu

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR) CD VCD

Repeat Play

This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.

Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that can be selected will differ.

Select "Off" to cancel.

Picture Menu

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR)

You can change the noise reduction setting when playing discs or images from the connected device.

Playback NR (Only when AV1, AV2 or AV3 is selected)

Reduces noise and picture degradation while playing.

  • On: Reduces noise and picture degradation. • Off: Video is played back as it is.

Input NR

Reduces the noise while recording.

● Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video tape. - On: Noise reduction works for any video input. - Off: Noise reduction is off. Select when you want to record input as is.

Sound Menu

You can change the settings of audio when receiving the multi-audio broadcast, and also change the settings of sound effect when playing discs.

DVB Multi Audio

[MPEG Audio only]

If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the desired channel before recording.

  • DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or recording.
  • Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected will differ.

English 1/ English 2

Dialogue Enhancer

HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR)

(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)

When "On", the volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue easier to hear.

Other Menu

Position

Change where this menu screen appears on your TV.

You can manage discs through formatting, finalising and other operations.

Accessing the Management Menus

Preparation:

  • RAM Release protection (→ below, "Setting Protection").
  • Insert a disc.

With the unit stopped

① Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD drive. ② Press [FUNCTION MENU]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Others", then press [OK].

DIGA FUNCTION MENU HDD Remain 30:00 SP Playback Recording Delete Copy TV Guide Others Drive Select OK -RETURN Playlists Flexible Res HDD Management Setup

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "HDD Management" or "DVD Management", then press [OK].

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Naming Discs

RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

You can give a name to the disc.

- -R Once a name is provided to a disc, it is not possible to record still images to that disc.

Perform preparation steps ①-④ of "Accessing the Management Menus" (⇒ above).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Disc Name", then press [OK]. Entering Text (⇒ 46).

Tips

  • -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL With a finalised disc, the name is displayed on the Top Menu.
  • +RW The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other equipment after creating top menu.

Setting Protection

RAM

Use to prevent accidental erasure of disc.

Perform preparation steps ①—④ of "Accessing the Management Menus" (⇒ above).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Disc Protection", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

Deleting All Titles

You can delete all titles on HDD or the single-sided DVD-RAM at once.

Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

HDD RAM

Perform preparation steps ①–④ of "Accessing the Management Menus" (⇔ left).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Delete all titles", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK]. ⑦ Press [◀] to select "Start", then press [OK]. – A message appears when deleting is finished. ⑧ Press [OK] to complete.

Notes

  • Deleting does not work if one or more titles are protected.
  • Still picture data (JPEG), Playlists (Picture), music data or computer data cannot be deleted.

Formatting Discs

HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW -RW(VR)

+R +R DL (New disc only)

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment.

You can record or edit after formatting the finalised DVD-RW. Important: Once formatted, contents cannot be recovered.

Perform preparation steps 1–4 of "Accessing the Management Menus" (⇔ left).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Format HDD", "Format Disc", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK]. ⑦ Press [◀] to select "Start", then press [OK]. - Formatting starts (RAM may take up to a maximum of 70 minutes). - A message appears when formatting is finished. ⑧ Press [OK] to complete.

Notes

  • Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting. This can render the disc unusable.
  • When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not be possible to use it on any other equipment.
  • -R -R DL CD Formatting cannot be performed.
  • -RW(V) -RW(VR) You can format only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
  • The message "Unable to format" appears when trying to format discs the unit cannot use.
  • Sample pictures are restored when formatting HDD even if they have been deleted.

Selecting the background style—Top Menu

-R -R DL +R +R DL +RW

You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-Video top menu after finalising or creating the Top Menu.

(+RW)

Perform preparation steps 1–4 of "Accessing the Management Menus" (⇒ 68).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Top Menu", then press [OK].

⑥ Press [▲, ▼, ◀, ▶] to select the background, then press [OK].

Top Menu List Display after finalising Thumbnail (Still picture) Title Name

  • You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (⇒ 48, Change Thumbnail)

- -R This function cannot be used for discs with still images recorded on them.

Selecting Whether to Show the Top Menu First — Auto-Play Select

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW

Before finalising a disc, select whether the top menu shows after finalising.

Perform preparation steps 1-4 of "Accessing the Management Menus" (⇒ 68).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Auto-Play Select", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Top Menu" or "Title 1", then press [OK].

• Top Menu: The Top Menu appears first.

- Title 1: The disc content is played without displaying the Top Menu.

- -R This function cannot be used for discs with still images recorded on them.

Finalising

-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL

You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by finalising it on the unit, effectively making it into DVD-Video that complies with DVD-Video standards. The menu you create with the unit can also be used on most DVD players.

Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the Management Menus” (⇒ 68).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Finalise", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK]. ⑦ Press [◀] to select "Start", then press [OK].

- Finalising starts and cannot be cancelled (may take up to 15 minutes) (-R DL +R DL up to 60 minutes)

– A message appears when finalising is finished.

⑧ Press [OK] to complete.

Notes

  • Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising. This can render the disc unusable.
  • When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately 4 times longer). • After finalising

- -R -R DL +R +R DL The disc becomes play-only and you can no longer record or edit it.

- -RW(V) You can record and edit the disc after formatting although it becomes play-only after finalising.

- When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.

– The disc finalised on the unit may not be playable on other players depending on the condition of the recording

– There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters during playback.

– Chapters are created automatically

(-R -RW(V) about 5-minute chapters* +R about 8-minute chapters*), if

– the titles were directly recorded to the disc. – the titles were copied using any mode other than the high speed mode. * This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode of recording.

Tips

- After you have finished recording or copying and try to eject the disc, a screen asking if you want to finalise the disc appears ( ⇒ 26).

Create Top Menu

+RW

+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW disc on other equipment.

Perform preparation steps 1–4 of "Accessing the Management Menus" ( ⇒ 68).

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Create Top Menu", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK]. 7 Press [◀] to select "Start", then press [OK]. - "Create Top Menu" cannot be cancelled once started. - "Create Top Menu" takes a few minutes. ⑧ Press [OK] to complete.

Notes

  • Recording or editing on the disc may delete the Top Menu In that case, create the Top Menu again.
  • You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.

You can change the unit's settings using Setup menu.

Accessing the Setup Menu

With the unit stopped

① Press [FUNCTION MENU]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Others" and press [OK].

DIGA FUNCTION MENU HDD Playback Recording Delete Copy TV Guide Others Drive Select OK Return Remain 30:00 SP Playlist Flexible Rec HDD Management Setup

③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Setup", then press [OK].

④ Press [▲, ▼] to select a menu, then press [▶] to go to the item list.

Menus Setup Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others Item Remote Control Clock Owner ID Standby Settings System Update Initialize Options DVD 1

⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select an item to change, then press [OK].

⑥ Press [▲, ▼] to select the option, then press [OK].

Notes

- Changed settings remain intact even when switching the unit to standby mode.

Tips

To return to the previous screen Press [RETURN 1]. Even if you have changed an option, the change is not activated until you press [OK].

To exit the screen Press [EXIT].

Channel Settings

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Channel Settings - 1

⇒ Others ⇒ Setup

(⇒ left, Accessing the Setup Menu) All factory default settings are indicated with "Underlined" text.

Tuning

Favourites Edit

You can create four Favourites of channels for making viewing and recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the channel setting itself.

  • Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourites during timer recording standby.
  • Channel numbers cannot be changed, due to broadcast restrictions.

Setup Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others Favourites Edit DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality DVB Auto Setup by Region DVB Manual Tuning Add New DVB Channels Signal Condition DVB Preferred Multi Audio End DVB Preferred Subtitles End Favourites Editor All Channels 1 BBC ONE Wales 2 BBC 2…

To select the Favourite Press the "Green" button.

To add channels to a Favourite

1 Press [▲, ▼] to select the channel in the "All Channels" column to add, then press the "Yellow" button. - Repeat this step to add other channels. - Press the "Blue" button to add all the available channels to the Favourite. (Only when no channels have been added to the Favourite.)

2 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

To change the order of channels of a Favourite 1 Press [▶].

2 Press [▲, ▼] to select the channel in the "Favourite" column to move, then press the "Green" button.

3 Press [▲, ▼] to select the new position of the channel, then press the "Green" button. - Repeat the steps 2–3 to move other channels.

4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

To delete channels on a Favourite

1 Press [▶]

2 Press [▲, ▼] to select the channel in the "Favourite" column, then press the "Yellow" button.

- Repeat this step to delete other channels.

- Press the "Blue" button to delete all the channels from the Favourite.

3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite. Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel itself. You can still select the channel from the "All Channels" column.

To change the name of a Favourite in the "Favourite" column 1 Press [▶] *.

2 Press the "Red" button. (⇔ 46, Entering Text) * When the station name of the "All Channels" column is highlighted

DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality DVB Auto Setup by Region

You can restart auto channel setting for digital terrestrial channels if the setup (⇒ 13) fails for some reason.

If you want to set the channel list best suited to your region, select "DVB Auto Setup by Region". Follow the on-screen instructions to select the region you live in.

However, if you perform "DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality" or "DVB Auto Setup by Region", all channel settings, Favourites and all the timer recording programmes are deleted. (All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings PIN, Owner ID, Clock and remote control code, etc. return to the factory preset.) Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.

When the confirmation screen appears

Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

Tips

- You can also use the following method to restart DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality.

When the unit is turned on and stopped, press and hold [CH ∧] and [∨ CH] on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds. – Auto-Setup screen appears.

DVB Manual Tuning

You can set channels manually if the "DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality" or "DVB Auto Setup by Region" could not be completed successfully.

Setup Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others Favourites Edit DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality DVB Auto Setup by Region DVB Manual Tuning Add New DVB Channels Signal Condition DVB Preferred Multi Audio DVB Preferred Subtitles DVB Manual Tuning Frequency Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strengt…

1 Press [▲, ▼] to select the channel you want to set.

- Select the channel by checking the signal strength and signal quality displays. [Refer to "Signal Condition" (→ right) for signal strength and signal quality.]

2 Press [OK] to start scan.

The set channel is displayed in the table.

- Repeat steps 1–2 to tune other channels.

DVB Manual Tuning Frequency ICRS 73.0 Signal Quality 6 Signal Strength 0 No. NewChannel Name Type: 1 BBC ONE Wales TV - 2 BBC 2W TV - 3 BBC NEWS 24 TV - 4 BBC Radio Wales Radio - 5 ITV TV - TV: 15 Radio: 4 Data: 0 8 DVB channels found.

3 Press [EXIT], then press [∧ ∨ CH] to check that applicable channels have been selected.

Add New DVB Channels

You can search for newly added digital terrestrial channels to receive.

Setup Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others Favourites Edit DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality DVB Auto Setup by Region DVB Manual Tuning Add New DVB Channels Signal Condition DVB Preferred Auto Audio Eng DVB Preferred Subtitles Eng Add New DVB Channels Scan CH 21 68 CH Channel Name Type…

- The unit starts searching for newly available digital terrestrial channels. This takes about 5 minutes.

- The bar over the table shows you the search progress. At the end of the search, the number of found new digital stations appears.

- "No new DVB channels found.", is displayed when no new channels can be found.

Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.

Tips

To cancel in the middle

Press [RETURN]

Signal Condition

You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.

When "Signal Condition" is displayed in grey and cannot be selected:

1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.

2 Press [^ v CH] to select a digital channel. "D" appears on the unit's display.

3 Display the Setup menu again.

Setup Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others Favourites Edit DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality DVB Auto Setup by Region DVB Manual Tuning Add New DVB Channels Signal Condition DVB Preferred Multi Audio DVB Preferred Subtilies English English DVB Signal Condition DVB Channel [CH54] 20 BBC…

The quality and strength of the signal are shown.

Press [∧ ∨ CH] to select the channel.

Signal Quality

Below 2 (display red)The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the pictures and sound.
2-5 (display orange)The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in the pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.
Over 5 (display green)Optimum picture and sound quality.

Signal Strength

The display for signal strength is grey. "0" means signal strength 0%, "10" means signal strength 100%. - If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red. Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial. - When the signal is weak:

– check that the aerial is correctly positioned.

  • adjust the aerial reception with "DVB Manual Tuning" in the Setup menu ( ⇒ left). – check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly broadcasting.
  • Check that your aerial is capable of receiving DVB broadcasts.

DVB Preferred Multi Audio

Choose the audio language for digital broadcast.

If the selected language is not available, then the original language will be selected.

[English] [Welsh] [Gaelic]

DVB Preferred Subtitles

Choose the subtitle language for digital broadcast.

If the selected language is not available, then the original language will be selected.

[English] [Welsh] [Gaelic]

[English for hearing impaired]

[Welsh for hearing impaired]

[Gaelic for hearing impaired]

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DVB Preferred Subtitles - 1

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - DVB Preferred Subtitles - 2

Others → Setup

(⇒ 70, Accessing the Setup Menu)

All factory default settings are indicated with "Underlined" text.

Disc

▲, ▼ select "Disc" → ▶ → ▲, ▼ select item

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Disc - 1

Setup Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others Settings for Playback Settings for Recording 100% 50.027 1 1678

Settings for Playback

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Ratings

Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.

Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the

numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown.

Do not forget your PIN.

- Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)

[8 No Limit] All DVD-Video can be played.

[1] to [7] Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding ratings recorded on them.

[0 Lock All] Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.

- Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)

[Unlock Recorder] [Change PIN]

[Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]

Soundtrack

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish] [Original] [Other*****]

Subtitles

[Automatic] [English] [German] [French]

[Italian] [Spanish] [Other****]

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish] [Other****]

Notes

DVD-V: Choose the language for audio, subtitles, and disc menus. If a language that is not recorded is selected, or if languages are already fixed on the disc, the language set as the default on the disc will be played instead.

[Original] The original language of each disc will be selected.

[Other*****] This is the language code setting. Input a code number with the numbered buttons (see 84, Language code list).

[Automatic] If the language selected for "Soundtrack" is not available, subtitles of that language will automatically appear if available on the disc.

Settings for Recording

- Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Recording time in EP mode

Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode.

[EP (6hours)] You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7GB disc.

[EP (8hours)] You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7GB disc.

Chapter Creation

Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (=> 49)

[Automatic] [5 minutes]

[Off] No chapter start points are set.

Recording Format

Titles recorded to the HDD with "Recording Format" set to "Video format" can be copied to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using high speed mode. However, aspect, etc. is restricted. (=> 57, Important) We recommend turning the setting "VR format" if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme. This setting is effective when recording from a television programme or external equipment, or when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.

[VR format] High speed copy from HDD is possible only to DVD-RAM.

[Video format] You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

- You are no longer able to switch the audio when watching a programme on an input channel on the TV connected to this unit (e.g., AV1, etc.).

- In some cases, copying to DVD-R, etc. using the high speed mode does not work (⇒ 57, Important)

DVD Speed for High Speed Copy

Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X discs).

[Maximum]

[Normal (Silent)] Selecting "Normal (Silent)" means the noise generated by this unit is less than "Maximum", however the time required for copying will double (approximately).

graph LR A["FUNCTION MENU"] --> B["Others"] B --> C["Setup"]

(⇒ 70, Accessing the Setup Menu)

All factory default settings are indicated with "Underlined" text.

Picture

▲, ▼ select "Picture" → ▶ → ▲, ▼ select item

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Picture - 1

Setup Comb Filter Off Still Mode Automatic Seamless Play On Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others

Comb Filter

Select the picture sharpness when recording.

The setting is fixed with "On" if you set "TV System" to "NTSC" (→ 74)

[On] Select it to record clear picture if the picture is noisy when "Off" is selected.

[Off] Normally, use this setting.

Still Mode

Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (→ 93, Frame and Field).

[Automatic]

[Field] Select if jittering occurs when "Automatic" is selected.

[Frame] Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns clearly when "Automatic" is selected.

Seamless Play

Select the play mode between Playlists (Video) chapter segments and partially deleted titles.

[On] The chapters in Playlists (Video) are played seamlessly. This does not work when there are several audio types included on the Playlists (Video) and when using Quick View (Play ×1.3). Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.

[Off] The points where chapters in Playlists (Video) change are played accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.

Sound

Dynamic Range Compression

DVD-V (Dolby Digital only)

Change the dynamic range (→ 92) for easier listening in low volume.

[On] [Off]

Digital Audio Output

Change the settings when you have connected equipment through the unit's Digital Audio Output terminal (→ 79).

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

PCM Down Conversion

Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96kHz. Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the above settings if the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.

[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the connected equipment cannot process signals with sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the connected equipment can process signals with sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

Dolby Digital*

Choose whether to output by "Bitstream", which processes Dolby Digital signals on other connected equipment, or to convert the signals to "PCM" (2ch) on the unit before output.

[Bitstream] When connected to equipment with a built-in Dolby Digital decoder.

[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in Dolby Digital decoder.

DTS*

Choose whether to output by "Bitstream", which processes DTS signals on other connected equipment or to convert the signals to "PCM" (2ch) on the unit before output.

[Bitstream] When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS decoder.

[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in DTS decoder.

MPEG*

Choose whether to output by "Bitstream", which processes MPEG audio signals on other connected equipment or to convert the signals to "PCM" (2ch) on the unit before output.

[Bitstream] When connected to equipment with a built-in MPEG decoder.

[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in MPEG decoder.

Audio Mode for XP Recording

Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.

[Dolby Digital] (→ 92) [LPCM] (→ 93)

- The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of normal XP mode recordings.

- The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.

* Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can be harmful to your ears and speakers, and audio will not be recorded properly on media such as mini discs.

Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.

graph LR A["FUNCTION MENU"] --> B["Others"] B --> C["Setup"]

(→ 70, Accessing the Setup Menu) All factory default settings are indicated with "Underlined" text.

Display

▲, ▼ select "Display" ⇒ ▶ ⇒ ▲, ▼ select item

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Display - 1

Setup On-Screen Messages 5 sec. Unit's Display Bright New Channel Message Automatic Screen Saver On FUNCTION MENU Display Off Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others

On-Screen Messages

Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information screen (→ 45) disappears automatically.

The length of time the Control Panel (→ 44) is displayed can also be changed, but "Off" does not work.

[Off] The digital channel information is not displayed.

[3 sec.] [5 sec.] [7 sec.] [10 sec.]

Unit's Display

Changes the brightness of the unit's display.

Regardless of the setting, when "Power Save in Standby" (=> 76) is activated and this unit is turned off, the unit's display is turned off.

[Bright] [Dim]

New Channel Message

Set whether to display the confirmation message when a DVB channel is added.

[Automatic] When a new DVB channel is added, the unit will be informed automatically.

[Off] The Channel Messages are not shown.

Screen Saver

[On] When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].

[Off]

FUNCTION MENU Display

[On] When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be displayed. (=> 42)

[Off]

Connection

▲, ▼ select "Connection" ⇒ ▶ ⇒ ▲, ▼ select item

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Connection - 1

Setup TV Aspect 16:9 TV System PAL Tuning HDMI Settings Disc AV 1 Output Video Picture AV 2 Settings Sound Display Connection Others

TV Aspect

This setting needs to be changed when connected to a 4:3 standard aspect TV.

[16:9] [4:3] [Letterbox]

Notes

Aspect 4:3/16:9

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 1

4:3 standard aspect television 16:9 widescreen television

• [16:9]: When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.

- [4:3]: When connected to a 4:3 aspect television, side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture (⇔ 93, Pan & Scan).

- [Letterbox]: When connected to a 4:3 aspect television, widescreen picture is shown in the letterbox style (⇒ 93).

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 2

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 3

TV System

Change this setting if you connect an NTSC television or to record NTSC video from another source.

  1. Press [▲, ▼] to select the TV System, then press [OK].

[PAL]

  • Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system television. Programmes recorded using NTSC are played as PAL 60.
  • Select to record television programmes and PAL input from other equipment.
  • HDD Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the HDD.

[NTSC]

  • Select when connecting to an NTSC television. Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
  • Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
  • HDD Select when playing an NTSC input title recorded on the HDD.

The confirmation screen appears.

  1. Press [◀] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

Tips

To change the setting all at once (PAL/NTSC)

While stopped, press and hold [■] and [▲ OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds.

Notes

  • This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
  • If "NTSC" has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be used.
  • During recording, timer recording standby, or EXT LINK standby, this unit cannot play discs that do not match the "TV System" (PAL/NTSC) setting. Set "TV System" to match the discs before playing them. Change back the setting after playback of the disc; otherwise, recording may not record properly.

HDMI Settings *1

- Press [OK] to show the following settings.

HDMI Video Format ※2

You can only select items compatible with the connected equipment. If you are concerned about output picture quality, it may be improved by changing the setting.

- To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to connect the unit directly to a 1080p compatible HDTV. If this unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, the other equipment must also be 1080p compatible.

[576i/480i] [576p/480p] [720p] [1080i]

[1080p] When setting video output to "1080p", we recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion, etc.

[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p, or 576i/480i).

Aspect for 4:3 Video

To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television. The 4:3 picture from HDMI output will be slightly smaller than that from other outputs, e.g., Scart; this is not a malfunction of the unit.

[4:3] Picture output expands left or right.

[16:9] Picture is output as original aspect with side panels.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Aspect for 4:3 Video - 1

Digital Audio Output

[HDMI and Optical]

[Optical Only] Select this when the unit is connected to an amplifier via an optical digital audio cable (see page 79) and to a TV via an HDMI cable (see page 79), and you want to enjoy the highest quality audio from discs.

[On]

[Off] Select this when you do not want to use "HDAVI Control".

AV1 Output

Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.

[Video]

Select this when a TV that can receive a composite signal is connected.

[S Video]

Select this when a TV that can receive an S-Video signal is connected.

[RGB 1]

Select this when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If you always want to view the picture from the unit in RGB signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.

[RGB 2]

Select this when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If you want to switch to display the picture from the unit only during playback or when viewing menus, select this mode.

- If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select "RGB 1" or "RGB 2".

AV2 Settings

Set to match the connected equipment.

- Press [OK] to show the following settings.

AV2 Input

Set to "S Video" when receiving or recording S Video output from external equipment.

[Video] [S Video]

[Ext Link 1] When this unit is connected to a digital satellite receiver with a 21-pin Scart cable and this unit receives a control signal. Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by the control signal.

[Ext Link 2] When external equipment with a timer function is connected. Recording is continued while the image signal is being sent to the unit from the external equipment. Recording is stopped when the image signal is halted by turning the external equipment off.

*1 Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may not be able to change the settings.

*2 Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference.

Others

▲, ▼ select "Others" ⇒ ▶ ⇒ ▲, ▼ select item

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Others - 1

Setup Remote Control DVD 1 Clock Owner ID Standby Settings System Update Initialize Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others

Remote Control (⇒ 84)

[DVD 1] [DVD 2] [DVD 3]

Clock (see 14)

Owner ID (see 14)

In order to prevent another person from using this unit if it is stolen, you can set a PIN number and input your personal information. Once the PIN number has been set, you cannot return to the factory preset. Make sure not to forget this.

- PIN number - Name - House No. - Postcode

Standby Settings

- Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Power Save in Standby

[On] It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode when the unit is in standby mode.

[On "Power Save in Standby" is set to activate during the set Timer] time period. (see below)

[Off] It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode. (Quick Start mode)

1. Press [▲, ▼] to select "On Timer" and press [OK].

Power Save in Standby Power Save On Timer From 0:00 To 6:00 Number Saves standby power consumption by disabling Quick Start function and AV2 loop-through in standby. Press OK to manually set the period of Power Save.

2. Press [▲, ▼] to set the start time (hour).

3. Press [◀, ▶] to select the stop time and press [▲, ▼] to set the stop time (hour).

4. Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.

  • You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
  • You can set start and stop time by the hour.
  • If the clock has not been set, "Power Save in Standby" is activated at all hours.

Auto Standby

Set the time to automatically turn the unit off. After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be turned off once the set time has passed.

[30 minutes] [1 hour]

[2 hours] [4 hours] [6 hours]

[Off] The unit will not automatically turn off.

Auto Standby after OTR

[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch Recording (=> 26).

[Off]

Auto Standby after Copy

[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing copy.

[Off]

RF OUT (Aerial Signal)

[On] Broadcast signals are output from this unit. TV can receive broadcast signals even if this unit is in standby mode when connecting TV with this unit using the RF cable (⇔ 78).

[Off] Press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes" when the confirmation message is displayed. Broadcast signals are not output from this unit to reduce standby power consumption. • Power consumption is lowered additionally when "Power Save in Standby" is activated. • If this unit turns into standby mode when connecting TV with this unit using the RF cable, proper broadcast images do not appear on TV.

System Update

In order to update this unit, the TV Guide download, and support system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs software updates.

  • Press [OK] to show the following settings.
  • Update data and TV Guide download information are sent by an unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates, you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.
  • An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update is in progress, "SW-DL" appears on the unit's display.

You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.

Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress may damage the unit.

  • TV Guide download will take approximately 30 minutes. While the TV Guide download is in progress, "GUIDE" appears on the unit's display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by switching on the unit.
  • To avoid hearing the startup sound of System Update for the unit, perform the following steps.

- Select the time for Software Update (⇔ below, TV Guide/Software search period).

- Set "TV Guide Download in Standby" and "Software Update in Standby" (⇒ below) to "Off", and update manually (⇒ below, Software Update Search Now).

TV Guide Download in Standby

[On] When the unit is turned off, TV Guide data is downloaded automatically.

[Off]

Software Update in Standby

[On] You can perform the unit updates automatically when the unit is turned off.

[Off]

TV Guide/Software Search Period

Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download and updates when the unit is turned off. This can only be set when "TV Guide Download in Standby" or "Software Update in Standby" is set to "On".

- If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.

When the GUIDE Plus+ system is not available

[Automatic] The unit will give priority to searching for update data at midnight.

[14:00–18:00] [18:00–22:00] [22:00–02:00]

When the GUIDE Plus+ system is available

[Automatic]

[Daytime] Updating is executed during daytime (06:00–22:00).

Software Update Search Now

Start the search for new software manually.

A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn this unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of data. A message shows that the update has finished.

- If applicable update data is found, press [◀, ▶] to select "Yes", then press [OK].

GUIDE Plus+ System Information

You can check the condition of GUIDE Plus+ system of this unit.

Post Code

You can input the postal code which is necessary to download area specific information of GUIDE Plus+ system.

Initialize

- Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Shipping Condition

This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the ratings level, ratings PIN, Slideshow Settings, Owner ID and clock settings, etc.

[Yes] [No]

- The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

- Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.

Default Settings

This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the tuning settings, clock settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings PIN, Owner ID and remote control code, etc.

[Yes] [No]

- The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.

- Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.

Child Lock

The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] at the same time until "X HOLD" appears on the unit's display.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Child Lock - 1

If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, "X HOLD" appears on the unit's display and operation is impossible.

Tips

To cancel the Child Lock

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] at the same time until "X HOLD" disappears.

Using the Unit's Remote Control to Operate the TV

You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the television channel and change the television volume.

Turn TV on/off Input select TV VOL AV Volume CH Channel Select PAGE 1 2 3

① Point the remote control at the TV. ② While pressing and holding [TV], enter the code from the table below using the numbered buttons. e.g., 01: press [0] ⇒ [1] ③ Test the TV functions of the remote control for operability.

- If the functions do not work, repeat steps ① to ③ using different codes, if available. Some TVs may not be compatible with the unit's remote control.

Remote Control Codes for the TV

Manufacturer Code No.
Panasonic 01/02/03/04
AIWA 35
AKAI 27/30
BEJING 33
BEKO 05/71/72/73/74
BENQ 58/59
BP 09
BRANDT 10/15
BUSH 05
CENTREX 66
CHANGHONG69
CURTIS05
DAEWOO64/65
DESMET05
DUAL05
ELEMIS05
FERGUSON10/34
FINLUX61
FISHER21
Manufacturer Code No.
FUJITSU 53
FUNAI63/67
GOLDSTAR05/50/51
GOODMANS05
GRADIENTE36
GRUNDIG 09
HIKONA52
HITACHI05/22/23/40/41
INNO HIT05
IRRADIO30
ITT25
JINGXING 49
JVC17/30/39/70
KDS52
KOLIN45
KONKA62
LG 05/50/51
LOEWE 07/46
MAG 52
METZ05/28/79
MITSUBISHI05/19/20/47
MIVAR24
NEC36
NOBLEX33
NOKIA25/26/27/60/61
NORDMENDE10
OLEVIA 45
ONWA30/39/70
ORION05
PEONY49/69
PHILCO41/48/64
PHILIPS05/06/46
PHONOLA05
PIONEER37/38
PROVIEW 52
PYE05
RADIOLA05
SABA10
SALORA26
SAMSUNG32/42/43/65/68
SANSUI05
SANYO21/54/55/56
SCHNEIDER05/29/30
SEG05/69/75/76/77/78
SELECO05/25
SHARP18
SIEMENS09
SINUDYNE05
SONY 08
TCL31/33/66/67/69
TELEFUNKEN10/11/12/13/14
TEVION52
TEX ONDA52
THOMSON10/15/44
TOSHIBA16/57
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE05
YAMAHA18/41

Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

- You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (→ 43).

- You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television.

"AV1 Output" in the Setup menu is set to "RGB 1" or "RGB 2" (→ 75).

Make "AV2 Input" settings in the Setup menu (→ 75).

Use of the RF coaxial cable

  • Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables.
  • Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.

- Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.

Connect AC mains lead only after all other connections are complete.

BE SURE TO READ THE CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3.

Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette Recordergraph TD A["TV"] --> B["RF IN"] A --> C["AV"] A --> D["HDMI IN"] B --> E["RF IN"] B --> F["RF OUT"] C --> G["AV1(TV)"] C --> H["AV2(EXT)"] C --> I["HDMI AV OUT"] D --> J["AV"] K["To the aerial"] --> L["RF coaxial cable"] K --> M["21-pin Scart cable"] K --> N["HDMI cable"] O["This unit"] --> P["You c…

To record from a VCR

Refer to "Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver" (→ 28).

Connecting to a Television with Audio/Video Cable (not included)

  • You can connect this unit to a TV using the audio/video (AV) cable instead of the HDMI cable or the 21-pin Scart cable (see 10, 11, 79).
  • Using a Scart or HDMI cable gives a higher quality picture than this connection.
  • Connect to terminals of the same colour.

graph TD A["TV"] --> B["AUDIO IN VIDEO IN"] B --> C["R"] B --> D["L"] C --> E["Audio OUT"] D --> E F["Video"] --> G["L"] H["Audio"] --> I["R"] style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333 style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333 style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333 style I fill:#cff,stroke:#333

Adding an Amplifier or Receiver

Use these connections to play sound through speakers connected to an amplifier or system component.

Using an Audio Cable (not included)

It is possible to output 2-channel stereo sound.

- Connect to terminals of the same colour.

graph TD A["Amplifier or System Component"] --> B["VIDEO"] B --> C["AUDIO OUT"] D["AUDIO IN"] --> B style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Using an Optical Digital Audio Cable (not included)

It is possible to output multi-channel surround sound on DVD-Video.

graph TD A["Amplifier or System Component"] --> B["OPTICAL IN"] B --> C["This unit"] C --> D["OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (PCM/BITSTREAM)"] style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333 note1["Insert fully with this side up. Do not bend cable sharply."] --> A

  • Connect an amplifier or system component with a built-in Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG decoder.
  • Adjust settings in "Digital Audio Output" as needed, depending on other connections and the amplifier receiver (see 73).

Notes

  • When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting "Digital Audio Output" to "Optical Only" in the Setup menu (see 75). In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the television.
  • You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not meant for DVD.
  • Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable, check the terminal shape of the equipment to be connected.

Using an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Cable (not included)

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted, enabling you to enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cable. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.

- Use High Speed HDMI cables. Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilized. It is recommended that you use Panasonic's HDMI cable. When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the "HDAVI Control" function, linked operations would be possible. [⇒ 43, Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link "HDAVI ControlTM"/Q Link)]

  • It is recommended that you use Panasonic's HDMI cable. • Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.

graph TD A["TV"] --> B["Receiver"] B --> C["HDMI OUT"] B --> D["HDMI IN"] C --> E["This unit"] D --> E F["AV"] --> G["TV"] H["AV1(TV)"] --> G I["HDMI AV OUT"] --> E

Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)

If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following functions are available.

- Direct TV Recording (→ 26)

- Set "Digital Audio Output" to "HDMI and Optical" (⇒ 75). (The default setting is "HDMI and Optical".)

Notes

  • If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down-mixed (⇒ 92) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable (some discs cannot be down-mixed).
  • You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital DVI input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):

Depending on the unit, the picture may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable (audio cannot be output).

Set up

How can I enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p?

Connect the unit to a 1080p compatible HDTV using an HDMI cable. Set "HDMI Video Format" in the Setup menu to "1080p". (⇒ 12, 75)

What equipment is necessary to play multi-channel surround sound?

You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder and multi-channel speakers. (⇒ 79)

Can the headphones and speakers be directly connected to the unit?

➢ You cannot directly connect to the unit. Connect through the amplifier, TV, etc. (⇒ 79)

Is my TV compatible with progressive output?

All Panasonic televisions that have 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p input terminals are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of TV.

Discs

Can I play DVD-Video, and Video CDs bought in another country?

You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not include "2" or "ALL". Refer to the disc's jacket for more information. (⇒ Cover)

Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region number be played?

➢ Discs either without region encoding or region code 2 will not play on this unit.

Please tell me about disc compatibility with this unit.

This unit records and plays DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However, you cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible). (See pages 15, 16) This unit also records and plays high-speed recording compatible discs. (See page 94) After recording but before finalizing DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL: You may not be able to play and record discs on this unit after recording them on other Panasonic products or other manufacturers' equipment. You may not be able to play and record discs on other equipment after recording them on this unit. After finalizing the disc, however, you will be able to play it on any DVD-Video compatible player.

Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW compatibility with this unit.

This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs that have been recorded in one of the following standards: CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), MP3, and still pictures (JPEG). Close the session or finalize the disc after recording. This unit can recognize up to 300 folders (groups or albums) and 3000 files (tracks) on a disc with MP3 or still pictures (JPEG). (See pages 16, 17) You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with the unit.

DVB-T

Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital terrestrial broadcasts?

Any (terrestrial) roof aerial can be used. However, depending on the area where you live, a new aerial may be necessary. Consult your local TV aerial installer.

Can this unit receive or record High Definition (HD) broadcasts?

No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD) broadcasts.

GUIDE Plus+

Is it possible to program a recording, with a start and end time that are different from the GUIDE Plus+ system?

You can manually change the start and end time of programs in the Timer Recording menu. But if timings are altered by more than 10 minutes, "Guide Link" will not be able to function. (See page 22)

Can I receive GUIDE Plus+ system data via a connected digital satellite receiver or a Set Top Box?

No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with digital satellite receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your unit's manual timer programming. (See pages 28, 30)

How can I cancel a timer programming?

Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry, then press [DELETE *]. (See page 31)

What happens when I unplug my unit from the household mains socket?

The GUIDE Plus+ system data will not be updated. If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains for a longer period of time, then the GUIDE Plus+ data is lost. Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen. (See page 19, steps ①–②) The GUIDE Plus+ system data will be automatically updated.

Recording

Can I record from a commercially purchased video cassette or DVD?

Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVDs are copy protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.

Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, and +RW recorded on the unit be played on other equipment?

You can play these discs on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalising the disc on this unit. +RW: It is not necessary to finalise +RW. To enable play on other DVD players, please use "Create Top Menu" in the DVD Management menu. (See page 69) In any case, ability to play a disc depends on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc, and the capability and format constraints of the DVD player. If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment. Not all equipment will play these discs.

Can a digital audio signal from the unit be recorded to other equipment?

You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the "Digital Audio Output" settings to the following via the Setup menu: - PCM Down Conversion: "On" - Dolby Digital: "PCM" - DTS: "PCM" - MPEG: "PCM" However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted, and as long as the recording equipment is compatible with 48 kHz sampling frequency. (See page 73) You cannot record MP3 signals.

USB

What can or cannot be done using the USB port on this unit?

You can play MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB memory. (See page 38) You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the HDD, DVD-RAM. (See page 64) You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD. (See page 65) You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (See page 62) Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory. Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory cannot be formatted on this unit. Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (See page 17) This unit cannot be connected to a computer and it cannot record to an external device, i.e. an external hard drive via the USB port.

Music

Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the disc or USB memory?

No, you cannot.

On the Unit's Display

H☐☐, F☐☐(“☐”stands for a service number.)An error has occurred. The number following “H” or “F” depends on the status of the unit. Check the items below and in the Troubleshooting Guide. If the service number still does not disappear after the check, reset the unit (⇒ 84, To restore the unit if it freezes).If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service numbers and contact a qualified service person.
DVD(“☐”stands for a number.)The remote control and the main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control. (⇒ 84)
GUIDEGUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded. (⇒ 76)
HARD ERR*If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
NoERAS • You cannot delete items on this disc.The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREADThe disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.The disc may be incompatible or of poor quality. (⇒ 15, 16)You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished operation. Press [▲ OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (⇒ 7)
NoWRIT • You cannot write to this disc.The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
FINALWhen the screen asking if you want to finalise the disc appears, the message is displayed. (⇒ 26)
PLEASE WAIT*Displayed when the unit is started. This is not a malfunction.The unit is carrying out its recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while the message is displayed.
PROG FULL*There are already 32 timer recording programmes. Delete unnecessary timer recording programmes. (⇒ 31)
REMOVEThe USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device and turn the unit off.
SW-DLThe unit is performing a software update. (⇒ 76)
SP 35:50, LP 151h“SP”, “LP” and the numbers are examples.Available space on the HDD or disc. The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151 hours”.
UNSUPPORT*You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record onto. (⇒ 15, 16)You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory. (⇒ 17)
UNFORMAT*You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment. Format the disc to use it.However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted. (⇒ 26)
EXT-LThis unit is in EXT LINK standby. EXT LINK has been turned on and will stop operation on the unit until the recording has completed.Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or cancel linked timer. (⇒ 28)
F74The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction. If you have another HDMI cable, try to use it. If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
F75The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction. If you have another HDMI cable, try to use it. If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
U59 • The unit is hot.The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
U61 •(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation. Once the display disappears you can use the unit again.If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
U76HDMI cannot be output because this unit is connected to a model that does not support copyright protection.
U80, U81, U99The unit fails to operate properly. Press [⏻/l] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Press [⏻/l] on the main unit again to turn the unit on. If the message persists, perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup menu. (⇒ 71) or “Shipping Condition” (⇒ 76). If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
U88There was something unusual detected with the disc while recording, playing or copying; there was a power failure or the AC mains lead was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. Wait until the message disappears.If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
X HOLD • The Child Lock function is activated.Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ⊤ at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (⇒ 77)

On the TV

Cannot finish recording completely.Copy-protect signal was detected.The programme was copy-protected.
Disc is full, or maximum number of titles are recorded.Cannot finish recording completely.The HDD or disc may be full.The maximum number of title has been exceeded. (⇒ 25)HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW Create space by erasing unwanted titles. Even if you erase recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is no increase in disc space. Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW disc increases when the last title is deleted (space may increase slightly when you delete other titles). (⇒ 23, 47, 68)Use a new disc.
Cannot record.Maximum number of titles exceeded.
Cannot playback.TV system is different from the setting.To playback, please change the TV System in Setup.You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (⇒ 74)
Cannot play on this unit.You tried to play a non-compatible image. (⇒ 17)
No DiscThe disc is upside down. If it is a single-sided disc, insert it so the label is facing up.Ensure the disc is flat in the tray
No folders.There is no compatible folder on the media. (⇒ 17)
Not enough space in the copy destination.Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (⇒ 23, 47, 54, 68)Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination Capacity” is not exceeded. (⇒ 60, 63, 65)
This is a non-recordable disc.The disc may be dirty or scratched. (⇒ 7)The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, or +RW disc. (⇒ 15)You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW disc.Format the disc with the unit. (⇒ 68)You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
Unable to format.
This disc is not formatted properly.Format it using DVD Management in FUNCTION MENU.
Not enough space on HDD.Space of 4 hours ( in SP mode ) is necessary.Maximum number of titles is recorded on HDD. Please delete unwanted titles.-R DL +R DL It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are greater than 499.Delete unwanted titles from the HDD. (⇒ 23, 47, 54, 68)
The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.

When Other Panasonic Products Respond to this Remote Control

Use this function to synchronize the codes for the remote control and the main unit when there are other Panasonic products close to your unit.

With the unit stopped

① Press [FUNCTION MENU]. ② Press [▲, ▼] to select "Others", then press [OK]. ③ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Setup", then press [OK]. ④ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Others", then press [▶]. ⑤ Press [▲, ▼] to select "Remote Control", then press [OK]. ⑥ Press [▲, ▼] to select the code ("DVD 1", "DVD 2" or "DVD 3") and press [OK].

Setup Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others Remote Control Press "C" and "CK" together for more than 3 seconds on the remote control.

⑦ While pressing and holding [OK], press and hold the numbered button [1], [2] or [3] corresponding to the code set in step ⑥ for more than 5 seconds to set. ⑧ Press [OK] to complete.

When the following indicator appears on the unit's display

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - When Other Panasonic Products Respond to this Remote Control - 2

- Change the code on the remote control to match the code displayed for the main unit (⇒ step 7).

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN]

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

To Reset This Unit

To reset the unit's settings

All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings PIN, Owner ID, Clock and remote control code, etc. return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes and Favourites are also cancelled.

When this unit is turned on and stopped.

Press and hold [∨ CH] and [CH ∧] on the main unit for about 5 seconds.

- The Auto-Setup starts automatically. (→ 13)

To reset the ratings level settings

When this unit is turned on and stopped.

① Press [▲ OPEN/CLOSE] to open the disc tray. ② Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive. ③ Press and hold [● REC] and [▶] (PLAY/×1.3) on the main unit for about 5 seconds.

To restore the unit if it freezes

On the main unit

Press and hold [⏻/l] for more than 3 seconds.

- The unit is turned off.

Language code list

Enter the code with the numbered buttons.

Abkhazian: 6566Catalan:6765Gujarati:7185Lingala:7678Rhaeto-Romance:Tamil:8465
Afar: 6565Chinese:9072Hausa:7265Lithuanian:7684Tatar:8484
Afrikaans: 6570Corsican:6779Hebrew:7387Macedonian:7775Romanian:8279Telugu:
Albanian: 8381Croatian:7282Hindi:7273Malagasy: 7771Russian:8285Thai:
Amharic: 6577Czech: 6783Hungarian:7285Malay:7783Samoan:8377Tibetan:
Arabic: 6582Danish:6865Icelandic:7383Malayalam:7776Sanskrit:8365Tigrinya:
Armenian: 7289Dutch:7876Indonesian:7378Maltese:7784Scots Gaelic:7168Tonga:
Assamese: 6583English:6978Interlingua:7365Maori:7773Serbian:8382Turkish:
Aymara: 6589Esperanto:6979Irish:7165Marathi:7782Serbo-Croatian:8372Turkmen:
Azerbaijani: 6590Estonian: 6984Italian:7384Moldavian:7779Shona:8378Twi:
Bashkir: 6665Faroese: 7079Japanese:7465Mongolian:7778Sindhi: 8368Ukrainian:
Basque: 6985Fiji:7074Javanese:7487Nauru:7865Singhalese:8373Urdu:
Bengali; Bangla:Finnish:7073Kannada:7578Nepali: 7869Slovak:8375Uzbek: 8590
French:7082Kashmiri: 7583Norwegian:7879Slovenian:8376Vietnamese:
Bhutani: 6890Frisian:7089Kazakh:7575Oriya:7982Somali:8379Volapük:
Bihari: 6672Galician: 7176Kirghiz:7589Pashto, Pushto:8083Spanish: 6983Welsh:
Breton: 6682Georgian:7565Korean:7579Persian:7065Sundanese:8385Wolof:
Bulgarian: 6671German:6869Kurdish:7585Polish:8076Swahili:8387Xhosa: 8872
Burmese: 7789Greek:6976Laotian:7679Portuguese:8084Swedish:8386Yiddish:
Byelorussian: 6669Greenlandic:7576Latin:7665Punjabi:8065Tagalog:8476Yoruba:
Cambodian: 7577Guarani:7178Latvian, Lettish:7686Quechua:8185Tajik:8471Zulu:

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.

The following does not indicate a problem with the unit:

• Regular disc rotating sound. - Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions. • Image disturbance during search. - Periodic interruptions to the reception due to digital satellite broadcasting breaks. - Operations are slow to respond when "Power Save in Standby" is activated. - Operations are not working due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a Panasonic disc.) - The unit freezing due to the activation of one of its safety devices (⇒ 84, To restore the unit if it freezes). - When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.

No power.

The unit does not turn on pressing [∅].

Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket. (⇒ 11) Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby ("EXT-L" on the unit's display blinks when [☐] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby. (→ 28) ▶ Check the fuse in the plug.

The unit switches to standby mode. The unit is turned off automatically.

One of the unit's safety devices is activated. Press [∅/l] on the main unit to turn the unit on. If you connected this unit to an "HDAVI Control" compatible TV with an HDMI cable, or connected this unit to a Q Link-compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode. (→ 43)

This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.

This is a normal phenomenon when using VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 4 or later). For details please read the operating instructions for the TV.

The display is dim.

➢ Change "Unit's Display" in the Setup menu. (⇒ 74)

"0:00" is flashing on the unit's display.

➢ Set the clock. (⇒ 14)

The time recorded on the disc and the available time shown do not add up.

The displayed time of this unit is different from the actual recording time or MP3 recording time.

➢ Times shown may disagree with actual times. -R -R DL +R +R DL The remaining capacity does not increase even if titles are deleted. Available space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW disc increases when you delete the last title (space may increase slightly when you delete other titles). If you record or edit about 200 times or more, the remaining capacity of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, and +R DL is reduced and then recording or editing may be disabled (for the second layer on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after about 60 times). The time during searching may not be displayed accurately.

The clock is not correct.

Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time correction function may not work. In this case, "Automatic" is automatically turned to "Off". If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting does not work, set the time manually. (⇔ 14)

Compared to the actual recorded time, the elapsed time displayed is less.

(Only when recording in NTSC)

The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.

The clock does not display on the unit when switched to standby.

➢ Ensure "Power Save in Standby" is deactivated. (→ 76)

General Issues iteration

Cannot operate the TV with unit's remote control.

➢ Change the manufacturer code on the remote control. (⇒ 77) It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries. (→ 84)

The remote control doesn't work.

The remote control code is wrong. Change to the correct code. (→ 84) The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (→ 7) Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the main unit. (→ 7) Remove obstacles between the remote control and the main unit. Remove dust from the transmission window and the unit's sensor. Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission. Don't place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sun exposure. It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries. (→ 77) If the "X HOLD" is displayed on the unit's front display, the Child Lock function is activated. (→ 77) If the "EXT-L" is displayed on the unit's front display, Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby. (→ 28)

The unit is on but cannot be operated.

Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly. (→ 20, 21) Some operations may be prohibited by the disc. The unit is warm ("U59" appears on the unit's display). Wait until "U59" disappears. (→ 82) One of the unit's safety devices may have been activated. Reset the unit as follows: Press [☐/I] on the main unit to switch to standby mode. If the unit doesn't switch to standby mode, reset the unit (→ 84, To restore the unit if it freezes). The unit cannot be operated while performing an update. "SW-DL" appears on the unit's display while it is updating. Please wait until the "SW-DL" disappears. (→ 76)

"U88" is displayed and the disc cannot be ejected.

The unit is carrying out the recovery process. The disc may be defective. Do the following to eject the disc. Try another disc. 1 Press [∅/I] on the main unit to switch to standby mode. If the unit doesn't switch to standby mode, reset the unit (→ 84, To restore the unit if it freezes). 2 While the unit is turned off, press and hold [■] and [CH ∧] on the main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. (Ejection may take extra time depending on discs.)

Cannot eject a disc.

The unit is recording. The unit may have a problem. Eject the disc as in 2 above.

Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby ("EXT-L" on the unit's display blinks when [⏻] is pressed.) Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby. If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock function. (→ 28, 77)

Startup is slow.

  • Startup takes time in the following situations: – A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
  • The clock is not set.
  • Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
  • When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable. Deactivate "Power Save in Standby" in the Setup menu. (→ 76)

General Issues IDE Plus+

The GUIDE Plus+ system does not receive any data.

Check whether the clock is properly set. (⇒ 14) If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the GUIDE Plus+ system may not be able to receive any data. Perform "DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality" in the Setup menu. (⇒ 71) Natural disasters, system trouble or other such factors may make it impossible for TV GUIDE to be used. Panasonic shall in no way be liable for any damages or losses related to the use of TV GUIDE.

"No Data" is displayed for some or all stations.

Some stations are not supported by the GUIDE Plus+ system. Programme the timer recording manually. (→ 30) Perform "DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality" in the Setup menu. (⇒ 71)

The GUIDE Plus+ information is not displayed properly.

There was a programme change or GUIDE Plus+ information from a broadcast station was possibly not correctly transmitted. Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the GUIDE Plus+ system provider or station provider.

The GUIDE Plus+ data is not updated.

The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If the unit is in EXT LINK mode ("EXT-L" lights up in the unit's display), then the data update may also not work. Make sure that the time is set correctly. (⇒ 14) Make sure that "TV Guide Download in Standby" is set to "On" in the Setup menu. (→ 76)

General Issues B-T

Digital broadcasts cannot be received.

Check the connections. (⇒ 10, 11, 78) Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet. The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station, or the direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer. Perform "DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality" in the Setup menu. (⇒ 71)

TV reception worsens after connecting the unit.

This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from electronics retailers.

General Issues B-T (Continue)

After "DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality" or "DVB Auto Setup by Region" only some or no DVB channels are found.

Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions. Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB. Perform "DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality" in the Setup menu. (⇒ 71)

Picture regularly breaks up on some channels, "No Signal" message is displayed.

Check "Signal Condition". If "Signal Quality" or "Signal Strength" are displayed in red or constantly changing, check aerial. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer. (→ 71) ➢ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB. ➢ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household appliances such as light switches, fridges, etc. may cause picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer. ▶ Check aerial connection. Adjust the aerial reception with "DVB Manual Tuning". (71) ➢ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup menu. (⇒ 71)

Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or all channels.

Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant lightning storms or heavy rain with wind in "leafy" locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort momentarily. Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a "noisy" ignition system. ➢ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup menu. (⇒ 71)

Unusual station sorting.

The station sorting of this unit is pre-defined. Use Favourites to sort the stations as you want them. (→ 70)

The digital channel information does not appear.

Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the "On-Screen Messages" in the Setup menu. (⇒ 74) The digital channel information will not appear during playback or recording. ➢ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup menu. (⇒ 71)

No Digital Teletext

Not all functions of Digital Teletext work on this unit. When subtitle is on or additional information in the digital channel information is displayed, Digital Teletext does not work. ➢ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup menu. (⇒ 71)

After the Auto-Setup, there aren't any stations in the station list although found stations were displayed during Auto-Setup.

“Shipping Condition” was performed or the unit was in the delivery status. The Auto-Setup was then started and interrupted.

Do an Auto-Setup again and let it continue right through to the end. The data is only saved after this has been completed.

The Signal Strength is over 100% (> 10)

➢ Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial. (→ 71)

After performing a software update, you can no longer receive broadcasts.

Depending on the content of the software update, some settings may have returned to the preset values. Perform "Shipping Condition" in the Setup menu and then set the channel. (⇒ 13, 76)

➢ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front display when the unit is powering on. Make sure that "VIERA Link" is set to "On". (⇒ 75) ➢ Check the "HDAVI Control" settings on the connected device. Some functions may not work depending on the version of "HDAVI Control" of the connected equipment. This unit supports "HDAVI Control 5" function. If the connection for the equipment connected with an HDMI cable was changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, "HDAVI Control" may not work. In this case, perform the following operations. 1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again. 2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the "HDAVI Control" function to off, and then set to on again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.) 3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this unit's screen is displayed, check that "HDAVI Control" is working.

The Control Panel does not appear.

The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV with "HDAVI Control 2" or later function. (→ 44)

The operation on this unit (music playback etc.) is interrupted.

The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA Link functions.

General Issues B

The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.

Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again. ➢ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (→ 18) The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory may be damaged.) (⇒ 17, 18) The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (⇒ 18) ➢ Turn off and then turn on the unit again. USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a USB hub may not be recognized by this unit. ➢ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (⇒ 17) If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB memory may not be recognized by this unit.

Playback Issues picture

The images from this unit do not appear on the TV. Picture is distorted.

Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly. (⇒ 10, 11, 12, 78, 79) ➢ Try connecting an alternative cable. Make sure recorder is connected to an appropriate AV input of the TV. (⇒ 10, 11, 12, 78, 79) Make sure the TV's input setting (e.g., AV1) is correct. The TV isn't compatible with RGB signals. Set "AV1 Output" in the Setup menu to "Video". (⇒ 75) The unit's "TV System" setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [■] and [▲ OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (⇒ 74) When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit's TV system. ➢ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.

TV reception worsens or becomes impossible after connecting the unit.

This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from electronics retailers. ➢ Broadcast signals may not be output from this unit's RF OUT terminal. Select "On" in "RF OUT (Aerial Signal)" in the Setup menu.(→ 76)

Picture does not appear during timer recording.

Timer recordings work regardless of whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the unit on.

The screen changes automatically.

When "Screen Saver" in the Setup menu is set to "On", the display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if there is no operation for 5 minutes or more. Press [OK] to return to the previous screen. Set "Screen Saver" in the Setup menu to "Off" to turn off the screen saver function. (→ 74)

The 4:3 aspect ratio picture expands left and right. Screen size is wrong.

If you connect an HDMI cable, set "Aspect for 4:3 Video" in the Setup menu to "16:9". (⇒ 75) ➢ Check the settings for "TV Aspect" in the Setup menu. (⇒ 74) It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television's operating instructions.

Titles recorded with 16:9 aspect are stretched vertically.

16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases. - -R -R DL -RW(V) If you recorded or copied using "EP" or "FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)" recording mode. - If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW. It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television's operating instructions.

There is a lot of after-image when playing video.

➢ Set "Playback NR" in the Picture menu to "Off". (→ 67)

There is no apparent change in picture quality when making adjustments in the Picture menu using the on-screen display.

The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video.

Cannot see the beginning of the title played.

(If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable) When [▶] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit's remote control, but you may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [I◀◀], return to the beginning of the title.

The picture is distorted during play, or video will not play correctly.

You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or unfavourable weather conditions. The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between recorded titles in the following situations: – between titles recorded with different recording modes. – between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios. – between scenes recorded with different resolutions. – between playlist chapters. Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly. (⇒ 10, 11, 12, 78, 79) ➢ Try connecting an alternative cable.

Playback Issues

No sound.

Low volume.

Distorted sound. Cannot hear the desired audio type.

Check the connections and the "Digital Audio Output" settings. Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected one. (⇒ 10, 11, 12, 73, 75, 79) ▶ Check if TV is muted. ➢ Check if amplifier is muted. Sound is not output while fast-forwarding during chasing playback and simultaneous record and playback. The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal. ➢ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected devices. To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set "Digital Audio Output" to "HDMI and Optical" in the Setup menu. (⇒ 75) ➢ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable. Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly. (⇒ 10, 11, 12, 78, 79) ➢ Try connecting an alternative cable.

Playback Issues (Continued)

Cannot switch audio.

You cannot switch the audio in the following cases. - When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected. - When the recording mode is XP and "Audio Mode for XP Recording" is set to "LPCM". (⇒ 73) When recording a digital broadcast with multiple audio channels, this unit will record only the audio channel selected in "DVB Multi Audio" in the on-screen display. The audio channel cannot be switched during playback. (⇒ 67)

You have used a digital connection. Set "Dolby Digital" to "PCM" or connect using audio cables (analogue connection). (⇒ 73, 79) There are discs whose audio cannot be changed due to how the disc was created.

Playback Issues Operation

Play fails to start even when [▶] (PLAY) is pressed. Play starts but then stops immediately.

Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (See 18) The disc is dirty, scratched, or marked. (See 7) You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on the unit. (See 15, 16, 18) You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalized on the equipment used for recording.

You may be able to copy a "One time only recording" title that was recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit's HDD, but play is not possible due to copyright protection. When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8 hours) mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6 hours) mode. (See 72) Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

Audio and video momentarily pause.

This occurs between playlist chapters. This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, and +RW that have been copied using the high speed mode. This occurs as scenes change during Quick View (Play ×1.3). -R DL +R DL When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (See 15)

DVD-Video is not played.

Ensure the DVD-Video region number for the disc is correct, and the disc is not defective. (See Cover) You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting. (See 72)

Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be selected.

The languages are not recorded on the disc.

You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc's menus to make changes. (See 20)

No subtitles.

Subtitles are not recorded on the disc. Turn the subtitles on and select "Text" or the subtitle number. (See 66)

Angle cannot be changed.

This function depends on software availability. Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.

You have forgotten your ratings PIN.

With the tray open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [● REC] and [▶/×1.3] on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 or more seconds.

Quick View (Play ×1.3) does not work.

This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital. This does not work while recording in XP or FR mode.

The resume play function does not work.

➢ Memorized positions are cancelled when: - press [■] several times. - open the disc tray. - CD, VCD, USB, or turn off the unit. - execute a recording or timer recording.

The Video CD picture does not display properly.

When connecting to a multi-system TV, select "NTSC" in "TV System" in the Setup menu. (→ 74) When connecting to a PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during search.

Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.

These functions do not work with finalised discs.

Time Slip does not work when the unit's "TV System" settings are different from the title recorded on the disc. (→ 74)

Cannot see the beginning of the title played.

(If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable) When [▶] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit's remote control, you may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [◀◀], return to the beginning of the title.

Playback Issues: Music

ID3 tag of an MP3 file is not completely displayed.

Only the track name (HDD, USB) and artist name (HDD) can be displayed with this unit.

Playback Issues: Pictures

Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.

This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy, or while the unit is standing by for linked timer recording with external equipment.

Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.

The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive JPEG etc., may not playback. (⇒ 17)

Recording Issues

Recording/Timer Recording/Copying/External input

Cannot record.

Cannot copy.

You haven't inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto. (⇒ 15) RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. (⇒ 68) The disc is protected with the "DVD Management" settings. (⇒ 68) Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM). (⇒ 24, 92) The disc is full or nearly full. Delete unneeded titles (HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW) or use another disc. (→ 23, 47, 68) You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc. ➢ Video cannot be recorded onto a DVD-R with still images recorded on it. - -R DL +R DL In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy. - If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode recording is necessary). - If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 499. (⇒ 23, 47, 68) ➢ You cannot record and copy on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL discs. However, you can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW. If you repeatedly insert discs or turn the unit on and off about 50 times or more, the recording or editing of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, and +RW discs may be disabled. DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW discs recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders. This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed. (⇒ 74) Some broadcasts are copyright protected. (→ 15, 24, 92)

Timer recording does not work properly.

The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the programme. (⇒ 31) The programme is not in timer recording standby. ("☐" in the timer recording list is not on.) (⇒ 31) 1 Press [PROG/CHECK]. 2 Press [▲, ▼] to select the programme and press the "Red" button. The clock is not correct. Set the clock. (⇒ 14) The programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system may not be correct. It is recommended to modify the start and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes. (⇒ 22)

Timer recording does not stop even when [■] is pressed.

When using the linked timer recording with external equipment, press [EXTLINK]. ("EXT-L" on the unit's display disappears.) (⇒ 28) If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while "Power Save in Standby" is not activated (Quick Start mode), you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds. Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive. (⇒ 21)

Recording Issues

Recording/Timer Recording/Copying/External input (Continued)

The timer programme remains even after recording finishes.

The timer programme remains if set to daily, weekly or series timer recording. (→ 30, 31, 34)

Part or all of a recorded title has been lost.

If the power shuts down or the AC mains lead is disconnected from the household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost titles or discs. You will have to format the disc (HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW) or use a new disc. (⇒ 68)

Stripe-shaped black noise is recorded.

An external playback device is interfering with the TV because the device is too close to the TV. Move the device away from the TV.

The programme name and the recorded title do not match.

There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the recorded title still has the old programme name.

Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc. disc using the high speed mode.

When recording to the HDD, set "Recording Format" to "Video format" in the Setup menu. (The default setting is "Video format"). (72) In the following cases, high speed mode does not work, even if the titles were recorded with "Recording Format" set to "Video format". (57) - +R +R DL +RW If recorded in "EP" or "FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)" mode - +R +R DL +RW If recorded in 16:9 aspect - -R -R DL -RW(V) If recorded in 16:9 aspect using "EP" mode or "FR" (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode +R +R DL +RW Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD Recorders with "Recording Format" ("Rec for High Speed Copy") set to "Video format" ("On"), and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs with high-speed copy.

When copying, it takes a long time even in high speed mode.

Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc. It takes longer than normal to copy many titles. You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.

An unusually loud sound is coming from the rotating DVD-R, etc.

When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is not a problem.

Cannot record video or sound from the external device.

The external device is not correctly connected. (→ 11, 12, 29, 78, 79) The proper external input channel (AV2 or AV3) is not selected. Press [INPUT SELECT] to change.

Recording Issues Music

Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.

If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS restrictions, they will not be copied. ➢ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed. ➢ Bonus tracks may not be copied.

Editing Issues DVD & DVD

Cannot edit.

You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space. Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (⇒ 23,47,68)

Cannot format.

The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry. (→ 7) ➢ Disc may be defective or of poor quality. You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the unit. (⇒ 15, 16, 68)

Cannot create chapters.

Cannot mark the start point or the end point during "Partial Delete" operation.

The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption in the power. These operations are not possible with still pictures. You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a start point.

Cannot delete chapters.

➢ HDD RAM When the chapter is too short to delete, use "Combine Chapters" to make the chapter longer. (⇒ 49)

The available recording time doesn't increase even after deleting titles on the disc.

Available space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, or +R DL does not increase even after deleting previous titles. ➢ Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when you delete the last title.

Cannot create a Playlist (Video).

You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select them individually.

Editing Issues II Pictures

Can not copy JPEG files to disc.

You can copy JPEG files from HDD to DVD-RAM or DVD-R or from USB memory to DVD-RAM. (→ 62, 64)

Bitstream

This is a signal compressed and converted into digital form. It is converted back to a multi-channel audio signal, e.g., 5.1-channel, by a decoder.

CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)

CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with CPRM-compatible recorders and discs.

Decoder

A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This is called decoding.

Deep Colour

This unit incorporates HDMI technology that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when connected to a compatible TV. You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding.

A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep Colour.

The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.

Dolby Digital

This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2 channel) audio, these signals can also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can be recorded on one disc using this method.

When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default audio.

Down-mixing

This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your TV's speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing. If this is the case, this unit can only output the front two channels.

Drive

In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc (DVD). These perform the reading and writing of data.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are possible.

Dynamic range

Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds. This means you can hear dialogue clearly at low volume.

Film and Video

DVD-Video is recorded using either film or video. The unit can determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable method of progressive output.

Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24 frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30 frames per second as well.) Generally appropriate for motion picture films.

Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second (PAL discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.

Finalise

A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL on the unit. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted to become recordable.

Folder

This is a place on the hard disk or disc where groups of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.

Formatting

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment.

You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format), +RW, and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.

Formatting irrevocably erases all contents.

Frame and Field

Frame refers to the single images that constitute the video you see on your TV. Each frame consists of 2 fields.

Diagram showing a bridge over water with a sun symbol, alongside a grid of horizontal lines and vertical bars, possibly illustrating a mathematical or physical concept.

Frame Field Field

  • A frame still shows 2 fields, so there may be some blurring between them, but picture quality is generally better.
  • A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but there is no blurring.

HDD (Hard disk drive)

This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i) and 1080p (1125p)] from HDMI AV OUT terminal. To enjoy high-definition video a high definition compatible television is required.

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures. If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the data will be compressed to 1/101/100 of its original size. The benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the degree of compression.

LPCM (Linear PCM)

These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on CDs.

MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)

A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video. MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2. SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)

An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately 1/10 of its size without any significant loss of audio quality.

Pan & Scan/Letterbox

In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they will be viewed on a widescreen TV (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often don't fit regular TVs (4:3 aspect ratio). 2 styles of picture, "Pan & Scan" and "Letterbox", deal with this problem.

Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture fills the screen.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Pan &amp; Scan/Letterbox - 1

Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and bottom of the picture so the picture itself appears in an aspect ratio of 16:9.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Pan &amp; Scan/Letterbox - 2

Playback control (PBC)

If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and information with menus on the screen.

(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)

Protection

You can prevent accidental erasure by setting writing protection or erasure protection.

RGB

This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G), and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them. By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission, noise is reduced for even higher quality images.

Sampling frequency

Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave (analogue signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the original sound.

Signal Quality

This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or "S/N"). The channels you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time (day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial, etc.

Thumbnail

This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display multiple pictures in the form of a matrix.

1080i

In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because 1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of 480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic and rich image.

1080p

In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

720p

In one high-definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

Power supply:

AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz

Power consumption: Approx. 25 W

Standby mode: ("Power Save in Standby" is activated and "RF OUT (Aerial Signal)" is set to "Off".)

Approx. 0.3 W

("Power Save in Standby" is not activated.)

Approx. 10 W

Recordable discs:

DVD-RAM: 2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 2–3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1) 2–5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)

DVD-R (SL): 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1–4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0) 1–8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1–16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)

DVD-R (DL): 2–4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2–8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)

DVD-RW: 1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1–2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1) 2–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2–6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

+R (SL): 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1) 2.4–8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2) 2.4–16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)

+R (DL): 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4–8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1) +RW: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

Recording system:

DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format

DVD-R: DVD-Video format

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format

DVD-RW: DVD-Video format

+R

+R DL (Double Layer)

+RW

Recording time:

Max. 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)

XP: Approx. 1 hour SP: Approx. 2 hours

LP: Approx. 4 hours EP: Approx. 6 hours or 8 hours

Maximum Approx. 567 hours with 320 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)

XP: Approx. 71 hours SP: Approx. 142 hours

LP: Approx. 284 hours EP: Approx. 426 hours/567 hours

Playable discs:

DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format, JPEG

DVD-R: DVD-Video format, MP3*1, JPEG*1

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format, MP3*1, JPEG*1

DVD-RW: DVD Video Recording format,

DVD-Video format

+R

+R DL (Double Layer)

+RW

DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD, SVCD*2

CD-R/CD-RW: CD-DA*1, Video CD*1, SVCD*1, *2,

MP3*1, JPEG*1

HDD capacity: 320 GB

Optical pick-up:

System with 1 lens, 2 integration units

(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)

LASER Specification

Class 1 LASER Product

Wave Length: 780 nm (CDs)

662 nm (DVDs)

Laser Power: No hazardous radiation is emitted

with the safety protection

Television system

Tuner System: DVB-T

Channel Coverage: UK

UHF: 21 to 68 ch

RF converter output: Not provided

Video

Video system: PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields

NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields

Recording system: MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)

Notes

- Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Video In (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)

S-Video In (PAL/NTSC):

1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

Video Out (PAL/NTSC):

AV2 (21 pin)

S-Video Out (PAL/NTSC):

1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin

jack), 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination

AV1 (21 pin), 1 Vp-p 75 Ω,

termination

RGB Out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 Ω,

termination

Audio

Recording system:

Dolby Digital 2 ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)

Audio In:

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)

Input Level:

Standard: 0.5 Vrms,

Input Impedance:

Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz

Audio Out:

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)

Output Level:

Standard: 0.5 Vrms,

Output Impedance:

Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz

Digital Audio Out:

Less than 1 kΩ

Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby

Digital, DTS, MPEG)

USB

USB port:

Type A: 1 pc

USB standard:

USB 2.0 High Speed

Format:

FAT16, FAT32

Video (SD-Video) 4

Codec:

MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment

Video Profile)

File Format:

SD-Video format conforming

HDMI Output:

This unit supports "HDAVI Control 5" function.

Others

Regional Code:

Operating temperature range:

5°C to 40°C

Operating humidity range:

10% to 80% RH

Dimensions (W×H×D):

(no condensation)

Mass:

430 mm × 59 mm × 286 mm

Approx. 3.4 kg

1 Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.

2 Conforming to IEC62107

This unit is not compatible with "Chaoji Video CD" available on the market including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107.

3 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from Panasonic digital video camera with HDD, etc. to HDD or DVD-RAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0+Digital Out is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

The Freeview service is subject to coverage. An aerial upgrade may be required. The FREEVIEW, FREEVIEW+, FREEVIEW HD and FREEVIEW+ HD words and logos are trade marks of DTV Services LTD. © DTV Services Ltd 2002, 2008.

GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Rovi Corporation and/or its related affiliates.

ROVI CORPORATION AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL ROVI CORPORATION AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.

http://www.rovicorp.com

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

"DVD Logo" is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

The recording and playback of content on this or any other device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Notes - 1

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries - 1

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries - 2

For business users in the European Union If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

(Back of product)

DANGER - VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
FDA21 CFR/VCLASS 36b
CAUTION - CLASS 38 BIRABLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.ICL00875-V/CCLASS 38
ATTENTION - RAYONNEMENT LASER VISIBLE ET INVISIBLE CLASSE 38, EN CAS DIOUVENTURE, ÉVITER UNE EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU.
FORSIGTIG - SYNLOG OG USYNI IG LÆSTERSTÅRLING KLASSE 38, NÄR LÄGET ER ABENT, UNDGA AT BUVE UDSAT FOR SRALEN.
VARO - AVATÄESSA OLIFT ALTILLA LUCKAN 38 NÄKYVÄÄ JA NÄKYVÄTÖNTÄ LASERSETÄLVÄ, VARO ALISTUMBSTA SÄTEELLE.
VARNING - CLASS 38 SYNJG OCH OSYNJG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÅR OPPNAND, UNDIVK EXPONERING FÖR STRÅLEN.
VORSICHT - SICHTBARE UND UNSCHITBARE LASERSTRAHUNG KLASSE 38, WENN ABDICKNG GEÖFFNET, NICHT DEM STRÅNL. ASSETZEIN.
注意 - 打开时有可见及不可见激光辐射。避免光束照射。
注意 - ごこをぐくとクラス38の可見及び不可見レーザ放射が出るピームの目又は音楽への極くては語願! 而り精たたりないことVQL2Q40

(Inside of product)

- For your safety, be sure not to connect or handle the equipment with wet hands.

Adjust the audio quality (Sound menu) 67 Adjust the picture quality (Picture menu) 67 Album (Music) Edit .... 54 Play .... 38, 41 Album (Still picture) Edit 52 Play 39 Angle 66 Aspect 74 Audio Digital broadcast (DVB Multi Audio)....67, 71 Disc....66, 72 Audio Description 30,45 Auto Renewal Recording 32 AV2 Settings 75 © Change Date 53 Change Thumbnail 48 Channel Select 19,30 Settings 70 Chapter 37,49 Chapter Creation 49,72 Chasing playback 27 Child Lock 77 Cleaning Disc ....7 Main unit ....7 Lens ....7 Clock Setting 14 Connection Aerial ..... 10, 11, 78 Amplifier, system component, receiver ..... 79 Digital satellite receiver ..... 11, 12 HDMI ..... 12, 79 Television ..... 10–12, 78–79 Video cassette recorder ..... 78 Copy Music....64 SD Video....60 Still picture....62 Title/Playlist....57 Copy (playlist) 51, 56 Copy to DVD/Copy to HDD 53 CPRM 92 Create Chapter 37, 49 Create playlists 50, 55 Delete Album (Music)....54 Album (Still picture)....52, 54 All titles....68 Chapter....49, 51 Playlist....50, 56 Still picture....52, 54 Title....23, 47 Track....54 Digital Audio Output settings .... 73, 75 Digital broadcast Digital channel information ..... 45 DVB Multi Audio ..... 45, 67, 71 DVB Subtitle ..... 45, 71 New Channel ..... 46, 74 Recording ..... 21 Select the channel ..... 19 Signal Condition ..... 71 System Update ..... 76 Timer ..... 22 Digital satellite receiver Connection ..... 11, 12 Recording ..... 28 Timer ..... 28 Watching ..... 19 DIRECT NAVIGATOR ..... 36, 39, 47, 52

Direct TV Recording 26 Discs 15–16

Display Digital channel information ..... 45 Status messages ..... 46

Divide Title 48

DVB Multi Audio Recording with selected audio . . . 21, 30 Select audio ..... 67, 71

DVB Subtitle Record with subtitle ..... 21, 30 Select subtitle ..... 71 Show subtitle ..... 45

Edit Chapter ..... 49 Music on HDD ..... 54 Playlist ..... 50, 56 Still picture ..... 52 Title ..... 47

Enabling discs to be played on other equipment — Finalise 69

Encrypted 45

Enter Album Name 53

External Link 28,75

Finalise 69, 92 Flexible Recording 27 Format 68, 93 FR (Flexible recording mode) 25, 27 FREEVIEW+ 22 FUNCTION MENU Display 42, 74

G GUIDE Plus+ 22, 33–35

H HDAVI Control 12, 43–44, 79

HDMI 12,75 High Speed Copy 59,72

① Initialize 76

JPEG 17, 18, 39–40, 93

Language Code list .... 84 Disc menu .... 72 Soundtrack .... 66, 72 Subtitle .... 66, 72

Linked timer recordings with external equipment (SKY Digital STB/digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK .... 28, 75 LPCM .... 73, 93

Manual Skip 37 Menu JPEG 39 MP3 38 Setup 70

Mode Recording 25 Still Mode 73

MP3 17, 18, 93 Copy 65 Edit 54 Play 38, 41

Music on HDD Copy....64 Edit....54 Play....41

N Name Album (Music) 54 Album (Still picture) 53 Disc 68 Entering text 46 Playlist 51, 56 Title 30, 47 Track 54

New Channel 46,74

Owner ID 14

P Partial Delete 48

Pause Live TV 42

Picture settings 67,73

Playing Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG) 38

R Ratings level settings 72

Recording 21

Aspect 24

Auto Renewal 32

Direct TV Recording 26

External Link 28

Flexible Recording 27

Notes 24

Satellite 28

Relief 32

Timer 22,30-35

Relief Recording 32

Remote control code 77

Repeat Play 41,67

Resume play function 20

Screen Saver 74

Select channel 19

Series recording 34

Set up Protection/Cancel Protection ... 53

Setup menu 70

Signal Condition 71

Simultaneous rec and play ..... 27

Slideshow 39,40

Soundtrack 66,72

Start Slideshow

Playlist (Picture) 56

Still Pictures and Music—Editing . . . 52

Still picture

Copy 62

Edit 52

Play 39

Subtitle

Digital broadcast (DVB Subtitle) ... 45, 71

Disc 66,72

Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc

(Disc menu) 66

System Update 76

Time Slip 37

Timer recording 22, 30–35

Tuning 70-71

TV System (PAL/NTSC) 74

USB

Copy (Music) 65

Copy (Still picture) 64

Insert 18

Play 38

Supported formats 17

V VIERA Link 12, 43–44, 75, 79

Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.

Pursuant to the applicable EU legislation

Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH

Panasonic Testing Centre

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

EU

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): - 2

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://panasonic.net

PANASONIC DMR-EX86 - Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): - 3

En

VQT4W60

F0313TJ0

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : PANASONIC

Model : DMR-EX86

Category : DVD Recorder